Business RadioX ®

  • Home
  • Business RadioX ® Communities
    • Southeast
      • Alabama
        • Birmingham
      • Florida
        • Orlando
        • Pensacola
        • South Florida
        • Tampa
        • Tallahassee
      • Georgia
        • Atlanta
        • Cherokee
        • Forsyth
        • Greater Perimeter
        • Gwinnett
        • North Fulton
        • North Georgia
        • Northeast Georgia
        • Rome
        • Savannah
      • Louisiana
        • New Orleans
      • North Carolina
        • Charlotte
        • Raleigh
      • Tennessee
        • Chattanooga
        • Nashville
      • Virginia
        • Richmond
    • South Central
      • Arkansas
        • Northwest Arkansas
    • Midwest
      • Illinois
        • Chicago
      • Michigan
        • Detroit
      • Minnesota
        • Minneapolis St. Paul
      • Missouri
        • St. Louis
      • Ohio
        • Cleveland
        • Columbus
        • Dayton
    • Southwest
      • Arizona
        • Phoenix
        • Tucson
        • Valley
      • Texas
        • Austin
        • Dallas
        • Houston
    • West
      • California
        • Bay Area
        • LA
        • Pasadena
      • Colorado
        • Denver
      • Hawaii
        • Oahu
  • FAQs
  • About Us
    • Our Mission
    • Our Audience
    • Why It Works
    • What People Are Saying
    • BRX in the News
  • Resources
    • BRX Pro Tips
    • B2B Marketing: The 4Rs
    • High Velocity Selling Habits
    • Why Most B2B Media Strategies Fail
    • 9 Reasons To Sponsor A Business RadioX ® Show
  • Partner With Us
  • Veteran Business RadioX ®

Decision Vision Episode 121: Should I Pitch on Shark Tank? – An Interview with Katy Mallory and Lou Childs, SlumberPod

June 17, 2021 by John Ray

SlumberPod
Decision Vision
Decision Vision Episode 121: Should I Pitch on Shark Tank? - An Interview with Katy Mallory and Lou Childs, SlumberPod
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

SlumberPod

Decision Vision Episode 121:  Should I Pitch on Shark Tank? – An Interview with Katy Mallory and Lou Childs, SlumberPod

Mother-daughter duo and Shark Tank contestants Katy Mallory and Lou Childs talked with host Mike Blake about why and how they invented the SlumberPod and what makes them a great business team. They also offered a behind the scenes perspective on the popular business reality television show, including what it takes to get on the show and how they prepared for their appearance. Decision Vision is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

SlumberPod

The idea for SlumberPod started in December 2014 when Katy and her husband and baby were visiting Katy’s mother (Lou) for the winter holidays. Because it was a packed house, the three had to share a room. The baby woke up two nights in a row—seeing her parents across the room—and refused to go back to sleep. Sleep-deprived and frustrated, Katy and her family went home a day early. Thing was … their baby was rarely a bad sleeper at home.

Katy scoured the internet for something she could bring on trips to provide her baby a private, dark place to sleep. When she didn’t find anything that fit the bill, she (like many others) resorted to homemade solutions to provide a visual barrier between her and her baby. The homemade solution worked but wasn’t safe, especially private or easy to set up.

While Katy was on maternity leave with twins in the spring of 2016, she and Lou decided it was time to create a safe, easy and portable solution to help make vacations more restful and fun for everyone—and SlumberPod was born!

They’ve had a ton of support and encouragement by way of friends and family, product designers, fellow entrepreneurs, advisors, and are proud to bring SlumberPod to market.

Between the two of them, Katy and Lou have nine children and lots of experience traveling with them.

Company website | Katy Mallory LinkedIn | Lou Childs LinkedIn

(You can find a clip of Katy and Lou’s Shark Tank pitch here.)

Mike Blake, Brady Ware & Company

Mike Blake, Host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series

Michael Blake is the host of the Decision Vision podcast series and a Director of Brady Ware & Company. Mike specializes in the valuation of intellectual property-driven firms, such as software firms, aerospace firms, and professional services firms, most frequently in the capacity as a transaction advisor, helping clients obtain great outcomes from complex transaction opportunities. He is also a specialist in the appraisal of intellectual properties as stand-alone assets, such as software, trade secrets, and patents.

Mike has been a full-time business appraiser for 13 years with public accounting firms, boutique business appraisal firms, and an owner of his own firm. Prior to that, he spent 8 years in venture capital and investment banking, including transactions in the U.S., Israel, Russia, Ukraine, and Belarus.

LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

Brady Ware & Company

Brady Ware & Company is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm which helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality. Brady Ware services clients nationally from its offices in Alpharetta, GA; Columbus and Dayton, OH; and Richmond, IN. The firm is growth-minded, committed to the regions in which they operate, and most importantly, they make significant investments in their people and service offerings to meet the changing financial needs of those they are privileged to serve. The firm is dedicated to providing results that make a difference for its clients.

Decision Vision Podcast Series

Decision Vision is a podcast covering topics and issues facing small business owners and connecting them with solutions from leading experts. This series is presented by Brady Ware & Company. If you are a decision-maker for a small business, we’d love to hear from you. Contact us at decisionvision@bradyware.com and make sure to listen to every Thursday to the Decision Vision podcast.

Past episodes of Decision Vision can be found at decisionvisionpodcast.com. Decision Vision is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX®.

Connect with Brady Ware & Company:

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:02] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast series focusing on critical business decisions. Brought to you by Brady Ware & Company. Brady Ware is a regional, full-service accounting and advisory firm that helps businesses and entrepreneurs make vision a reality.

Mike Blake: [00:00:21] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast giving you, the listener, a clear vision to make great decisions. In each episode, we discuss the process of decision making on a different topic from the business owners’ or executives’ perspective. We aren’t necessarily telling you what to do, but we can put you in a position to make an informed decision on your own and understand when you might need help along the way.

Mike Blake: [00:00:39] My name is Mike Blake, and I’m your host for today’s program. I’m a director at Brady Ware & Company, a full-service accounting firm based in Dayton, Ohio, with offices in Dayton; Columbus, Ohio; Richmond, Indiana; and Alpharetta, Georgia. Brady Ware are sponsoring this podcast, which is being recorded in Atlanta per social distancing protocols. If you like to engage with me on social media with my chart of the day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse and Instagram. If you like this podcast, please subscribe to your favorite podcast aggregator and please consider leaving a review of the podcast as well.

Mike Blake: [00:01:13] Today’s topic is, should I pitch on Shark Tank? And this is a cool episode to do for a lot of reasons. Obviously, Shark Tank is a fascinating phenomenon. It’s an attempt to put the American entrepreneurial dream on stage in a microcosm in sort of a miniaturized format. And I’m going to speak very vaguely about that because I’ve actually never watched the show start to finish. Maybe I watched five minutes or so, and I’ve watched the recording of the pitch of our guests that are coming on today.

Mike Blake: [00:01:51] But searching around, I looked it up, and Shark Tank has been around since 2009, which is a remarkable run for a television show and a remarkable run for a television show of the type that it is. But I think one of the things that really gives it its legs, if you will, is the fact that it does encapsulate something that we, as Americans, really romanticize, which is the one big shot, right? It’s Hollywood meets Silicon Valley. And just as entertainers want to be discovered, so do entrepreneurs want to be discovered.

Mike Blake: [00:02:30] And it’s an interesting form in the respect that most companies that get funded with venture capital are either software-based or they’re trying to cure a disease, for the most part. And neither of those things is bad, I’m not going to criticize either one, but the fact of the matter is, then, if you have a business where somebody has, for example, a consumer product, as we’re going to talk about today, the channels to go find that investment are frankly less clear. And so, it’s a fascinating phenomenon.

Mike Blake: [00:03:10] And our guests are a couple of folks I’ve known for a number of years. They’ve come to my office hours back in the days when we had office hours in person. I think I’m going to resume those back in August or so. And they ultimately took it all the way, which is just fantastic. And they’re such nice, humble people. You never know that they’ve produced the success that they have, but you’re going to feel the same way after you hear them. As I do, you’re going to be thrilled for every bit of success that they have.

Mike Blake: [00:03:46] And joining us today are Kate Mallory and Lou Childs, who are a mother-daughter team, who are co-founders of SlumberPod. They appeared on Shark Tank in 2020 – this is last year – and received an investment offer. And I’m putting it that way for a reason because I know a little bit about how the show works and we’ll learn more about that. But SlumberPod is the first portable privacy sleep nook that allows babies to sleep in their safe and familiar play yard or travel crib with room to sit up or stand up inside.

Mike Blake: [00:04:12] The patent-pending SlumberPod solves the age-old problem of getting a good night’s sleep while sharing a room with your little one. And I’ve been there. We’ve had two little ones, and we had some bloodshot eyes in those days. Babies and toddlers can easily nap in bright or distracting conditions approved for indoor use only.

Mike Blake: [00:04:28] Now, the other interesting thing is this is almost, really, if we’re honest about it, a kind of a side gig. Katy is also Director of Internal Communications, and Sales and Marketing at Cox Automotive here in Atlanta, and Lou is an adjunct professor of marketing at La Grange College. Kate and Lou, welcome to the program.

Lou Childs: [00:04:47] Thank you, Mike.

Kate Mallory: [00:04:49] Thank you, Mike.

Lou Childs: [00:04:49] So good to be here.

Mike Blake: [00:04:51] Yeah. And thanks for coming on. I know you have a lot of demands on your time. And also, I’m sure a lot of people want to talk to you because you’re, now, big stars. So, for the audience that has not heard of SlumberPod, what exactly is it beyond what I said? And how did you come up with the idea?

Kate Mallory: [00:05:12] Sure. So, you talked a little bit about the challenge we solve for, and that is the story of our product’s inception. So, my husband, Dan – who Mike happens to know, which is how Mike and I originally met – and I were visiting my mom for Christmas – what would that be – seven years ago? And our daughter, who was a great sleeper at home in her own private room with blackout shades, she slept so well at home, but we had to share a room at my mom’s house because it was filled with a lot of other family members, and there were blinds on the windows, but they didn’t really keep out the flood light that was right outside the window. And our daughter kept waking up, and seeing us across the room, and not being able to go back to sleep. So, we were thinking this would be a magical time of being together with family with our year-and-a-half-old daughter, and it turned out to be anything but that because we were miserable, and sleep-deprived, and we ended up going home a day early because we slept for two or three hours a night for those two nights that we were there.

Kate Mallory: [00:06:19] And as we were leaving and swearing off traveling any time soon, my mom said, “Gosh, there’s got to be something out there that you could buy that would help with this problem. Surely, you’re not the only one who deals with this.” So, I looked online for some kind of privacy barrier that goes over a crib, or a pack and play, or a play yard, and I couldn’t find anything. So, for a little while, when we finally were comfortable traveling again, we started bringing to cheap camera tripods with us, and a sheet, and ponytail holders or twist ties to attach the sheet to the tripods. And that created a temporary wall that kept our daughter from being able to see us and hotel rooms, but it didn’t solve for keeping her entire sleeping space dark. So, light was coming in through the shades or the curtains. She was still up at 5:30 or 6:00 in the morning. If she had to take a nap, it wasn’t dark in there. We were still tiptoeing around, looking at our phones under our covers or hiding in the bathroom. So, that certainly helped, but it was cumbersome to set up. It didn’t solve all the problems.

Kate Mallory: [00:07:27] So, flash forward to summer of 2016, when I was on maternity leave with twins, my mom very generously offered to spend a few months with us, helping us get on our feet as a family of five. And it was during that time that she said, “Katy, we’ve got this time together. You and I are both really industrious. We’re going to be watching these babies take naps. Why don’t we get serious about inventing a solution?” And so, we did. We filed for an LLC, I believe, in June 2016. And that’s when we got really serious about making what is now known today as SlumberPod.

Mike Blake: [00:08:03] Now, the other neat part of this, and I could make it a second show, but we won’t get into that today, but I mean, the dynamic mother-daughter working together. Mothers and daughters don’t always necessarily get along that well that you can start an entrepreneurial company together and be successful. And I know I’m going off the script here, but I think that’s okay. I am curious as to what is it about your relationship that’s made you be able to work together so successfully?

Lou Childs: [00:08:32] That is a really great question. And Katy and I have had what we found out now to be a unique mother-daughter relationship in that we have always gotten along. Katy’s a little bit of an old soul. So, in her teenage years, there weren’t a lot of rebellion. I’m also a pretty open person. I don’t typically overreact when something happens. I try and understand things from everybody’s point of view. So, she felt real good about bringing me issues, or problems or things that we talked through. So, we actually are really good friends.

Lou Childs: [00:09:21] I felt no, I guess, hesitation in getting a business together, because we know each other’s strengths and weaknesses. We know how each other reacts under stress or when the chips are down. And we both are really resilient. We have a lot of energy. We’re very determined. We do speak our mind, but we do so in a way that is respectful and loving. So, I can only think of maybe one time when maybe I was tired or Katy was that we just had to say, “Okay, we we need to go to bed, and we’ll reconvene on this topic tomorrow.” Otherwise, we talk things through really well. It’s been a great journey together, honestly. And the wonderful thing is I thought we were close before, but we’re really close now. So, it’s been a blessing.

Kate Mallory: [00:10:22] I was just about to say that that I feel incredibly fortunate that I get even more time with my mom than my siblings because of this business and what we’ve started together. And I have to brag on my mom too because one could think like, “Oh, what’s your mom going to bring to the table? She’s getting closer to retirement age.” And that could be nothing further from the truth. She’s one of the most technologically savvy people I know. She is a problem solver. She’s like, “Oh, the code needs to be updated on the website. I can do that, or I can implement this new piece of software, or I’ll research which review platforms will work the best and which integrate with our other systems the best.” She’s a dynamo.

Lou Childs: [00:11:03] Thank you. I enjoy it.

Mike Blake: [00:11:04] Well, I have a feeling I’ll get a lot of emails from people asking for your email address, Lou because people will want to be adopted. So, good for you, guys.

Intro: [00:11:13] What’s with more at this point?

Mike Blake: [00:11:16] So, what gave you the idea? I mean, you went through that process, what was a leap from starting the business and developing the product? Why go on Shark Tank? I mean, I haven’t really seen the show, but you probably have. And I know that not every entrepreneur’s experience on the show is awesome. What motivated you to think about that and try that?

Lou Childs: [00:11:42] So, first off, getting on the show is like a needle in a haystack. So, 40,000 people apply every year.

Mike Blake: [00:11:51] 40,000, wow!

Lou Childs: [00:11:53] Yes, every year. So, when we realized when we went on Amazon and after the first five months of being on the market, we had $150,000 in sales and we said, “Why not? We’re crazy. We really do love to have a lot of fun.” As those of you who have seen our pitch can see that we’re in pink pajamas with shark slippers. But we just said, “Hey, what the heck? We’ve got Delta miles. Let’s pick a spot and go stand in line and be in the casting call.” And that’s exactly what we did.

Lou Childs: [00:12:36] Katy is so good at public speaking. I’m a great sidekick and I’m a lot of fun. Of course, during the pitch, I forget my lines and the producers thought that was hilarious. But I think we’re endearing. I think that people kind of feel once they get to know us that they want to be our friend. So, it was easy. It was easy to just say, “Hey, what have we got to lose? We’ve got a great story, and let’s go have some fun.” And that’s what we did. And I think it really paid off that we had that attitude.

Kate Mallory: [00:13:16] My mom mentioned, Mike, that we had some sales, and I wanted to expand on that a little bit because from watching the show, which I think we both seen every single episode over the last 11 years, we’ve seen that when companies have no revenue or their only revenue is Kickstarter or Indiegogo campaigns, they really get the the ninth degree from the Sharks because the Sharks don’t feel like there’s enough to go on to feel confident investing. So, having that revenue and not just $5000 of revenue, but I think when we applied, what would you say, mom, it was more than $200,000 or $150,000 or something like that when we first applied? And then, by the time we recorded, we had $600,000 or $650,000 in revenue in just a couple of months. So, that made us feel confident.

Kate Mallory: [00:14:10] Of course, there is the exception of The Comfy, which is a brand that Barbara Corcoran invested in that was pre-revenue, but she just really felt like those entrepreneurs were magnetic and she went out on a limb and invested in them. But historically, that’s not the case.

Mike Blake: [00:14:27] And what’s interesting about that is in Atlanta, and really I think throughout the southeast among entrepreneurs, there’s a frustration among many entrepreneurs that angel investors really want companies that already have revenue, right? And I think, somehow, that a lot of them think that they’re kind of being picked on or the south is just a lousy place for investment. And what you’re talking about on Shark Tank, and those are very accomplished investors, right, they know what they’re talking about, it’s interesting that even they, when they’re on television and it’s as much entertainment and for them, brand building as it is making an actual investment, they’re still wanting to see that there’s some sort of customer validation out there.

Kate Mallory: [00:15:09] Absolutely. And another little disclaimer is that we had two private investors invest in us before we even had, really, a minimum viable product. And that is a result of maybe personality, but also some some privilege and connections as well. So, that helped us get off the ground because it is really challenging, especially with a product that has a pretty high manufacturing cost to do all the safety testing, and the marketing, and the market research and the product development. So, I feel where we feel for entrepreneurs who can’t get that seed money to get started. And we look forward to being able to get back.

Mike Blake: [00:15:48] It really is tough to get that money. And you’re right, those connections really help because I think – well, you tell me, but in my experience, when I’ve seen those pre-revenue investments happen, as much as anything that I think the investor is doing it because they want to just give you a chance to succeed. And then, if they get their money back, they’re thrilled, but they’re not looking at it like they’re JPMorgan saying, “I’m going to make a gazillion dollars out of this,” right? And that’s just the kind of way that capital works. Silicon Valley is an exception. It’s just that, right? You can get a few million dollars for a vaporware kind of thing but, man, it’s exception rather than a rule. You guys built it. You built it the right way. And I think you were clearly acknowledged for that.

Lou Childs: [00:16:36] Thank you.

Kate Mallory: [00:16:37] Thank you.

Mike Blake: [00:16:38] So, I’ve got to ask you because I did watch your pitch, I actually watched it a couple of times. And you had them rolling in the aisles when you were showing them kind of how people were trying to create dark spaces for their kids, right? And the canopy that you’re putting on the playpen with the jumper cables, and then that poor woman was trying to put tin foil over the window. I mean, it was just hilarious. Did you make those up, or are those kind of urban legends, or did you actually hear of somebody you know, somebody who actually tried to do those things?

Kate Mallory: [00:17:15] Seriously, people try, or do, have done those things. The jumper cable I’ve only heard once. But seriously, somebody did tell us that. I’m in a lot of mom groups, so that I can monitor for people mentioning SlumberPod. And I’ve seen people say, “Hey, I don’t want to buy a SlumberPod. It’s really expensive. What do I do?” And you’d be surprised how many people say, “Oh, we just drape a blanket over the pack and play,” which that doesn’t sound safe, or “We bring trash bags and we tape them to the windows,” or “We ask for a wheelchair-compliant hotel room,” which that’s kind of sketchy, “big enough to set up the pack and play inside. And then, we go down to the lobby in the night to use the bathroom.” So, the stories are are wild.

Lou Childs: [00:17:58] Oh wow!

Kate Mallory: [00:17:59] It really is crazy. And one little aside about the lady who was on Shark Tank with us, she actually was a customer, and we’d never met her, but she was such an enthusiast of our product that we invited her to come on the show with us.

Lou Childs: [00:18:12] And her son sleeps – and still does to this day, and he’s over three years old – he slept in a SlumberPod every night and every nap. So, I mean, even that day, he had napped in SlumberPod. But we filmed mid or late afternoon – I can’t remember exactly what time – and for him to be put inside a SlumberPod at a time when it wasn’t nap time, and who are all these people, and what are all these lights, of course, he was upset, he couldn’t figure it out, but the the pack and play was might. So, his little cries were a lot louder on TV than they were in reality.

Lou Childs: [00:18:55] But yeah, I mean, it was a challenge to keep going, but you’re given one take. So, we were in front of them almost an hour. And then, of course, they edited it down to seven minutes that you see on TV, but there were also a lot more laughter that you missed. So, one of the things that people that watched our episode missed was Laurie and Robert got inside a SlumberPod together and were talking about how dark it was. And Katy said something about this being an HR violation, and everybody just howled. So, we had a lot of fun taping that shed.

Mike Blake: [00:19:37] Well, you know, and I think it shows because I cannot – I mean, I did not realize it for first seven minutes of video. I guess it makes sense, but for seven minutes of video, you had an hour of actual material. I mean, I’d pay money into a Kickstarter to get whatever didn’t make the edit. I mean, that’s just got to be hilarious. And then, you have a crying child, which given what you’ve described, is predictable, right? It would have been surprising if you didn’t have a crying child in the background kind of in retrospect. And I’m curious, did you have that plan? Did you sort of think about, “Okay, what if he’s screaming his head off during the entire thing? How are we going to handle it? Or do we push through it?” Or was that was that just something that just came up and you had to deal with?

Lou Childs: [00:20:28] We thought about it, but didn’t really think that it would be a big deal if he whimpered or made some noise. I guess I didn’t realize that. Like Robert said, “Those are real tears. Damn it.” I didn’t realize that he would get that upset, but I think we handled it pretty well. Elizabeth, his mom was right there with them, scooped him right up, settled him down. I think he was just perplexed by the whole situation, but you just have to keep on going and no harm.

Kate Mallory: [00:21:12] That brings us to another key takeaway about the experience, especially for your listeners who might be interested in applying, is that being entertaining is critically important. So, if you go out there, and you’re low energy, and you’re boring, they might not take your episode to television because they record well more than how many they need. And we know people who went all the way out there, bought all the things for their set, taped it, and then it never ended up showing. So, while that crying baby may have hurt some of our ability to sell product, some people say, “Oh, that’s kind of scary. I don’t want my baby in that,” it certainly helped us make it to television because entertainment level is key.

Mike Blake: [00:22:00] Well, I think it’s just authenticity too. I mean, if you’re a parent for more than 10 seconds, you just realize that crying babies are a part of life. And sometimes, as a cause, you can address. And sometimes, there just isn’t. A baby just sometimes going to cry, and that’s just what there is to it, right? So, let’s walk it back a little bit. I’m really curious about what the process is. After you sent in an application, they tell you somehow, “Congratulations, we’d like you to be on Shark Tank, or go through some process,” what is that like? Were there are a lot of phases? What were the phases like? What did you have to do? How long did that? Can you to take us kind of through that timeline?

Kate Mallory: [00:22:42] Sure. So, some of it we’re under NDA about, of course, but we can still tell you quite a bit about what the experience was like. So, right now, I believe you can only apply for Shark Tank through video submissions, they might bring back the live auditions at some point, but we have the choice of submitting a video or doing a live audition. And we thought that we would have more of a chance of moving forward if we did the live audition because if we could really capture their hearts and minds in that one-minute opportunity, that would be much more telling than if a company re-records their pitched 300 times in order to get the perfect cut. So, that was one thing that we did.

Kate Mallory: [00:23:25] And it took, I don’t know, two weeks or so to hear back with, “Hey, you’re proceeding to the next step,” but with every step, they want you to submit either some paperwork or some other materials that tell more of your story. And then, of course, you’ve also got all the background checks and things like that that go along with it because they want to make sure that they’re investing their time and resources in people who don’t have criminal records or who haven’t been sketchy in some other way in the past.

Kate Mallory: [00:23:54] But the whole process took about four months from interviewing or auditioning, to being flown out there, but they do record for several months. We happened to be one of the first companies of that season to go out and interview. But you’re assigned producers, who were incredibly helpful in helping us put together like a storyline for our pitch. And since my mom and I are marketers by background, we blended their recommendations with some things that we thought would work well. But overall, it was a really neat experience.

Kate Mallory: [00:24:31] But to be honest, we kept asking ourselves, “When is this going to fall apart?” because certainly with how many people apply for this opportunity every year, are we really going to make it all the way to the end? And even once we taped, we had to say, “Okay, let’s not get too excited because it’s possible that it won’t end up happening, and they could pull us off the air at any point in time.” And with that, we had a lot of nondisclosures we had to sign. In fact, that’s a funny story that my mom could share real quick, if we have a second.

Mike Blake: [00:25:05] Yeah, please.

Lou Childs: [00:25:05] So, one of the steps in the process along the way, you have to send additional videos, but we had to script our pitch. And so I happened to be on an anniversary cruise with my husband, and the next video was due. So, in the NDA, it says you can’t tell anybody that you have gone beyond the casting call. So, I had not told my husband that we were doing this-

Mike Blake: [00:25:36] Wow!

Lou Childs: [00:25:36] … and we were on our way. I love my husband, but he can’t keep a secret. So, I mean that it would be on the next billboard in downtown Atlanta if I mentioned it. So, I had to send him on an excursion while Katy and I taped a Zoom call of us doing this pitch together. And then, we go out and we film in June. So, we still don’t know, are we going to be on the show or not. So, season 11 started that night during the season premiere. I said, “Oh, Tripp, let’s watch the season premiere. Shark Tank is going to be on.” The intro video has me and Katie running out of the set with our pink pajamas on. So, I’m looking at Tripp, and he’s looking at the TV, and then he looks at me, and he’s mad at first, and he’s like, “Oh, my God. You’re going to be on Shark Tank.” So, that’s how he found out.

Mike Blake: [00:26:39] That is funny. So, you must have had to go so far as to tell him you’re flying out to California and make up something like this.

Lou Childs: [00:26:48] I did. And I made up a story.

Mike Blake: [00:26:50] How did you sound, you think?

Kate Mallory: [00:26:50] But to meet with investors. We were going to meet with investors, which we were.

Mike Blake: [00:26:55] Okay. Well, that’s true.

Lou Childs: [00:26:55] I think I told him I was going to a conference.

Kate Mallory: [00:26:58] Oh, yeah. Yeah, maybe that. I told some people I was going to meet with investors.

Lou Childs: [00:27:03] There was a little bit of a white lie.

Mike Blake: [00:27:03] That is a howl. So, okay. So, this brings me then to a very natural question because I know that you’re – as I recall watching the video, you received two offers to invest in the company, right? You selected one because you liked it better. Was it by Lorie Greiner? Is that who? Who was it, the one you ultimately selected?

Lou Childs: [00:27:25] Barbara is the one we selected.

Mike Blake: [00:27:25] Barbara, that’s right. Barbara. See, I don’t watch the show.

Lou Childs: [00:27:29] And [crosstalk] gave us a licensing deal after he called it Slumber Prison.

Mike Blake: [00:27:38] Well, look, I would imagine they also have a specific persona they want to perpetuate to stay on the program. I wonder if they’re a little different in person than they are kind of on TV.

Lou Childs: [00:27:50] I loved it. It was funny.

Mike Blake: [00:27:50] So, even – I mean, I would have thought that after you’d agreed to accept an investment that you would have thought you’d still be on TV. But even then, there’s no guarantee, I guess.

Kate Mallory: [00:28:03] There is none.

Mike Blake: [00:28:05] So, now, from what I read, the investment part, the offer part is a little bit theatrical, right? Because it’s not a binding commitment to make an investment. Really just sort of as an effect. In my world, we just call that a letter of interest. Basically, a letter of intent. And then, they had to kind of do what they were going to do to be comfortable with the investment. So, are you under NDA for that or can you talk about what that process was like after offer to ultimately getting a deal done?

Kate Mallory: [00:28:37] So, actually, you have picked great timing for recording this podcast because we were under NDA until, I think, last month on how that all panned out. As you alluded to, Mike, what happens on TV, there’s more to it than what you see. And it’s true that when we went out there and presented that not one of those sharks knew anything about our company. So, they had blank pieces of paper. They don’t get a lineup of who’s going to come out there. And everything that we shared, we represented ourselves accurately. We memorized our answers, we had flash cards, we decided in advance who would answer which questions. We really worked hard to be buttoned up and got some good help in order to do that.

Kate Mallory: [00:29:25] But after that, that’s when the due diligence starts. And we worked with somebody from Barbara’s team, a guy named Mike Stevens, who was really lovely. And he met with us, at least, once a week for several months to go over any questions that he had to get our feedback on things. He requested documents, meeting notes, and financial projections and things like that. And he told us that while we were one of the most buttoned-up pair of entrepreneurs that he’d ever met, and he was very impressed by us, and Barbara was very impressed by us, and how they expected that we had a really bright future, ultimately, they decided not to move forward with investing in us because they hoped that we were already on retail shelves.

Kate Mallory: [00:30:11] We never said we were. We were one hundred percent honest and saying we’re on Amazon and on our own website, but we’re in discussions with retailers, but that was their rationale. So, they backed out, but that meant that we got all the exposure and didn’t have to give away any additional equity. And we didn’t need the money at that point. We were cash positive. So, really, it worked out the best way it could. I suspect that it’s something like 30 percent or less of the deals that go through on TV end up going through in real life because of the things that I just mentioned, but it’s sure still was a wonderful experience that we feel was worthwhile.

Mike Blake: [00:30:53] You know, and you bring up an interesting point that I don’t think is appreciated as investors are not infallible. And investors, when they get excited about a story, they can sometimes fill in gaps that they don’t realize they’re filling in gaps, right? And then, they hear, for example, that you’re selling $150,000 of product, and they therefore assume that either you’re already on store shelves or you have that in your plan. They just didn’t bother to ask that question.

Lou Childs: [00:31:23] No, they did. They did ask that question. So, that’s an even more fascinating part of it. And the other funny thing, for people who do watch the show that are listening, is you hear different reasons for why they want to not move forward. And sometimes, “We wish you were only online because the margins are better.” And other times, it’s “We wish you were in with retailers.” So, which is it? Because certainly, our online sales do really well for us, especially those on our website but-

Kate Mallory: [00:31:23] It might that the investors have a certain number that they strive to go through with and a certain percentage. And they say yes on TV knowing that a certain percentage of them are going to turn to nets.

Lou Childs: [00:32:10] Cast a wide net.

Mike Blake: [00:32:12] Yeah. Well, I think that’s interesting in terms of the inside baseball because I think if you’re not paying attention, you think that that’s an actual deal that’s happening in real time. And it’s a little bit of a deal, it’s happening, but not the deal, deal with the capital deals happening.

Lou Childs: [00:32:30] My only regret is that we didn’t get to go on Barbara’s trips because I really think she is an amazing businesswoman and such fun to be around. If you follow her on social, she is a hoot. And I would have loved to have gotten to know her personally.

Mike Blake: [00:32:50] Now, did you have a patent? Or I guess, you have a patent pending? Was your patent pending by the time you’re on Shark Tank?

Kate Mallory: [00:32:57] We were patent pending by that point. We filed for a provisional patent in the fall of 2016, and we converted that to a utility patent application about a year later. If you could believe it, we actually are still pending. We’ve had my numerous-

Mike Blake: [00:33:17] I believe it.

Kate Mallory: [00:33:17] … request for additional extensions. They call them RCEs. What does an RCE stand for? I should know this as an inventor but office actions, and appeals, and things like that. But we’re still working through that, but are confident that we’ll be able to come up with a few explanations for our claims that will allow us to be unique enough to receive that patent. But that’s something that definitely creates a little bit of stress and anxiety for us because we want our product to have that intellectual property protection, and it really is a moat that is hard to dig without it.

Mike Blake: [00:34:00] We’re talking with Katy Mallory and Lou Childs from SlumberPod. And the topic is, should I pitch on on Shark Tank? So, you weren’t allowed to tell anybody about the outcome until the thing actually was on air? How hard was that?

Lou Childs: [00:34:18] It was especially hard after we were in that intro video and people started coming up to me who watch Shark Tank and say, “I saw you on the Internet radio. You’re going to be on Shark Tank.” And I was like, “Oh, I don’t know for sure.” And we were so scared. But it was not hard to tell the outcome because that was easy to keep a secret because people know you can’t share that. But once the cat was a little bit out of the bag, it was really hard to hold back talking just about being on the show in general.

Kate Mallory: [00:34:58] I am-

Mike Blake: [00:34:59] [Crosstalk].

Kate Mallory: [00:34:59] Go ahead, Mike.

Mike Blake: [00:35:00] No, please go ahead.

Kate Mallory: [00:35:02] I was going to say I’m such an open book, it was hard to keep a secret because I just share everything. I think I had a co-worker asked me what I’d done lately, and I was like, “Oh, we just went to California. My mom and I did. And that was fun.” And I wasn’t even thinking. And he said, “What were you doing in California?” I said, “Oh, we were meeting with some investors.” And he said, “You weren’t on Shark Tank, were you?” And I was like, “Ah.” I wasn’t-

Mike Blake: [00:35:26] Why on earth would you say that?

Kate Mallory: [00:35:28] Yeah, I wasn’t expecting to get asked that. But I was really relieved, like my mom, once we showed up on that promo and then eventually got an air date because then we could talk about it a lot more. But it was tough to maintain or keep the excitement inside. And that is a memory that will hold on to forever how much fun everything was.

Lou Childs: [00:35:54] We’re in groups with other entrepreneurs. We’re in a Facebook group with – how many are in there? Like 40, Katy? – that are baby products. And several of those companies have applied and been on Shark Tank. So, it’s really fun to watch other people’s journeys. I have actually encouraged several people that I know that are entrepreneurs, and a couple of them are in the pipeline right now. So, I think it’s fun to be on this side and be a cheerleader for other people who are going through the same process. Now, we can’t help them because of the NDA process where we’re not allowed to be a part of whatever they’re doing, but I certainly encourage people to just go do it. Why not?

Kate Mallory: [00:36:49] I do have to add, though, that there’s been one time where somebody called me and was asking about going on the show, and I had to be very diplomatic but say, “I don’t think it’s going to be successful for you.” It’s a company that had no revenue, a Kickstarter campaign that didn’t end up meeting its goal. And she said, “Well, what if somebody just really believes in me?” And I said, “Well, there’s about a one percent chance of that, maybe five percent. And I don’t want to discourage you, but maybe this isn’t the right timing. Maybe you need to try again with a smaller goal on one of those fundraising things. And then, get product in people’s hands. But otherwise, I’m just afraid you’re going to get torn apart. And I hate to tell you that, but that’s also, I think why you called was to get my honest take.”

Lou Childs: [00:37:38] Yeah, good point.

Mike Blake: [00:37:40] Look at you now. You’re having office hours of your own.

Kate Mallory: [00:37:42] Hilarious. But she said, “Well, maybe another investor will see me on the show, and call, and want to invest even if I don’t get a deal on the show.” And it doesn’t often work like that, unfortunately. But most of the companies we talked to, we’re able to encourage them, especially if they have revenue, to go for it.

Mike Blake: [00:38:04] Yeah. The reality is that getting somebody to invest in a startup is hard, and it’s supposed to be hard, right? There’s just a lot more ideas out there and companies than there are dollars to fund them. There’s a scarcity. And for what it’s worth, I think, not only to think about the company, but I think you gave them good advice is that there’s always a chance you can get something funded. Bad deals get funded all the time. Is that a good thing or not? Who’s to say? But if you hang around long enough, you may run into that one person that finishes your sentences, and they just totally get it. You don’t have to explain. The next thing you know, you got $100,000 or a quarter of a million dollars in the bank.

Mike Blake: [00:38:46] You’ve mentioned a couple of times along the way that you had people help prep you for the Shark Tank experience. You can mention names or not, it doesn’t matter to me, but I’m just curious, what kinds of advices? What advice were you seeking? How did you work with them?

Lou Childs: [00:39:05] One of the things that they really require a lot of due diligence on are financials. So, we worked with a contract CFO to do projections and just help us with all of our financials. We also took the opportunity to get our books cleaned up because, boy, were they a mess and we didn’t know it. So, it was really a great wakeup call for us on the financial side, which is not one of Katy and my strong suits. So, it was really great timing for us to have that happen. Katy, what else can you think of?

Kate Mallory: [00:39:49] I was going to just add that that contract CFO, we literally asked her to pull about 20 different numbers out, so that when they said, “What’s your-” We know our landing costs but other margin numbers, we had all those memorized. And I wouldn’t have trusted myself to go and look at the spreadsheets and make those calculations myself. So, yeah, that was a huge, huge, huge help, I’d say for Shark Tank, those were the biggest pieces. And there, obviously, had been a lot of other vendor partners along the way who helped us with things like product development and manufacturing as well, because it takes a village, especially for a small company.

Mike Blake: [00:40:27] I think that what you talk about, as you described the financials, I think that’s so underrated. Accounting is just not sexy. I get it. I’m doing this. I’m a partner with a CPA firm. Accounting is not sexy, but boy, when you don’t have it right, you miss it. And I do think and this is underappreciated, “When people ask me what can I do to make my company more saleable?” have great accounting records, haven’t be bulletproof, have financials somebody can look at and they just know that they’re right and that you know they’re right. It gives you a lot of confidence. So, I did not expect you to spend so much time describing working on that, but I’m glad that you did. And I am very confident that’s why you received that comment that your “So buttoned up.”

Lou Childs: [00:41:16] I believe you’re right, because we had it all clean. And anything they ask us, we had an answer for whether it was during the taping or during due diligence.

Kate Mallory: [00:41:28] The only numbers thing I was really worried about was having to do math on the fly for our evaluation because I know that a lot of times, we went in asking for $400,000 in exchange for 20 percent of our company, and I was afraid they would ask, like, “Hey, we’ll do $400,000 , but I want 30 percent of your company,” and that I would have to then calculate what that made our valuation. And I’m a journalist by background. I am so comfortable looking at graphic design and writing articles, but oh, I would not have done well in accounting classes or finance classes. So, that terrified me and actually almost brought with me a little index card that had a cheat sheet of if they say this and this and it means this. But I ended up leaving it in our trailer at the last minute thinking they probably wouldn’t like me relying on something that was in my pocket. So, that was another reason why I was thrilled that they offered us our original request because I didn’t have to do the math.

Mike Blake: [00:42:33] Yeah, it was interesting. I think the comment was that they thought you were selling yourselves too short.

Lou Childs: [00:42:40] Yes, they spent a lot of time telling us that we really didn’t need an investor, but then Barbara’s comment was, “I’m going to take advantage of you.”

Mike Blake: [00:42:50] Yeah, and you know what? I think too. I think to an extent, that may have been right. So when did the program air, and when did you learn that you were going to be on Shark Tank?

Lou Childs: [00:43:07] That’s an interesting story, and dovetails with what Katy said earlier about some companies never make it to TV. So, we were originally slated for very early November. So, they give you two or three weeks in advance of your air date. And because we were on the intro video, we kind of suspected that we were going to air, but most entrepreneurs don’t have any idea until they get that email three weeks in advance that says, “Okay, here’s your air date, and you can start talking about it.”

Lou Childs: [00:43:43] So, we got that email, and we immediately started blasting social media that we were going to be on Shark Tank. Well, about five days later, we get another email saying, “Oops, no. Your date has changed. You are now the first.” I think, was it Sunday night then or Friday night? I can’t remember. Anyway, the first week of January 2020. And come to find out, one of the companies that was slated to be in our episode was ditched.

Mike Blake: [00:44:16] Oh, really?

Lou Childs: [00:44:16] So, it was replaced by another company and those people never aired.

Kate Mallory: [00:44:21] And the episode – so we tried out in February, early February. We recorded in early-ish June, was going to air in November, but then got pushed out to early January. So, more than six months past after we recorded. But we also know a company that recorded our same day, and she ended up finding out her episode wasn’t going to air. But then, during COVID, they pulled some of those cut segments out of the archives, and she did end up airing about a year and a half later after recording. So, you never know what’s going to happen.

Mike Blake: [00:44:55] That’s TV, I guess.

Lou Childs: [00:44:56] But we had the luxury that a lot of Shark Tank entrepreneurs don’t have in knowing for many weeks that we were going to be on Shark Tank. So, we started promoting it when they told us in late October, all the way through to January. We really felt that that boosted our November and December sales on top of it being holidays. People were like, “Well, when they get on Shark Tank, their inventory is going to sell out. So, we better order it now.”

Mike Blake: [00:45:33] So, now, you’ve had some distance. I don’t want to have you reveal proprietary data, but where is the company now? And how much did your Shark Tank experience impact your success?

Kate Mallory: [00:45:48] That’s a great question. So, we don’t know for sure. I’ll start with the latter part of the question. So, we don’t know for sure what our sales would have been like if we had aired in November, but we have a feeling they would have been a little bit higher following our appearance because that was in advance of Thanksgiving and other winter holiday travel. So, with the new air date, that was after people had bought Christmas gifts, Hanukkah gifts, then doing all their traveling. And so, with less money available, had already done their traveling, they probably thought to themselves, like, “Oh, I’m going to earmark this for a later date, but I might not purchase right now.” Our website traffic was up like 20x, but sales were only, I don’t know, two and a half or three times more than usual for that day and a half or two days following the show.

Kate Mallory: [00:46:42] So, I took off work. We cleared our calendars, so that we could answer any social media questions and the barrage of emails that would come in, and we didn’t get as much of that as we expected at that time, which felt a little disappointing in the moment. But we now recognize that it’s all about the long tail. It’s not just about how you’re going to do immediately following your airing. So, we are able to have “As seen on Shark Tank,” on our website. It mentions it on our Amazon listing where members of these, I don’t want to say elite, but exclusive communities of people who were on Shark Tank where we can share best practices and network, and you’re only in because of that opportunity.

Kate Mallory: [00:47:29] So, even with it not being quite the sales boom that we expected, we recognized that it all worked out really well. And we went on after – let’s see, when we recorded, we’d done about $600,000 in sales, mostly in that calendar year. And then, we ended up almost – let’s see, we did $1.5 million for the back half the year.

Mike Blake: [00:47:56] Okay.

Kate Mallory: [00:47:56] So, we did really well. And then, we doubled that in 2020. And then we’re looking like we’ll probably double that again this year.

Lou Childs: [00:48:04] Or more.

Mike Blake: [00:48:05] I would think so, especially now that people are going back to traveling if you’re able to grow when travel is at a standstill.

Lou Childs: [00:48:12] That’s right.

Mike Blake: [00:48:13] Right. I mean, now, the gloves are off. Well good for you guys. Ladies, this has been, really, just a fun talk. Learned a lot of things I did not expect to learn today. And other people may want to kind of get your advice, maybe a thing about Shark Tank or a similar program like, I don’t know, Dragons Den or whatever it is. If they want to get your advice like you’ve been able kind enough to give out, can they contact you? And if so, what’s the best way to do that?

Lou Childs: [00:48:42] I think the easiest way for people to remember how to get in touch with us is just to email our customer service. It’s contact@slumberpod.com. And then, our customer service team can forward it either to me or Katy. And we’ll get back to them as soon as possible.

Mike Blake: [00:49:02] All right. So, just mention to them that you heard them on the Decision Vision Podcast. They know that you’re not Riff-Raff trying to get in. And I’m sure they’ll be happy to take care of you. So, this is awesome.

Mike Blake: [00:49:14] That’s going to wrap it up for today’s program. I’d like to thank Katy Mallory and Lou Childs so much for joining us and sharing their expertise with us. We’ll be exploring a topic each week, so please tune in, so that when you’re faced with your next business decision, you have clear vision when making it. If you enjoy this podcast, please consider leaving a review of your favorite podcast aggregator. It helps people find us, so that we can help them. If you like to engage with me on social media, with my chart of the day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse and Instagram. Once again, this is Mike Blake. Our sponsor is Brady Ware & Company. And this has been the Decision Vision Podcast.

 

 

Tagged With: Brady Ware & Company, Katy Mallory, Lou Childs, Mike Blake, Shark Tank, SlumberPod

Decision Vision Episode 120: Should I Change Careers? – An Interview with Lauren Fernandez, The Fernandez Company

June 10, 2021 by John Ray

The Fernandez Company
Decision Vision
Decision Vision Episode 120: Should I Change Careers? - An Interview with Lauren Fernandez, The Fernandez Company
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

The Fernandez Company

Decision Vision Episode 120: Should I Change Careers? – An Interview with Lauren Fernandez, The Fernandez Company

Lauren Fernandez tells her story of “taking the law degree down off the wall in an executive office, putting it away in a closet, and putting on a hairnet and clogs.” Lauren joined host Mike Blake to discuss both the successes and difficulties of her career journey moving from corporate counsel to restaurant owner/operator. Decision Vision is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

The Fernandez Company

The Fernandez Company specializes in helping restaurant brands grow from 2 units to 20 and beyond. Lauren Fernandez is fully immersed in the restaurant industry as an operator, developer and executive with deep business and industry understanding. The Fernandez Company generates new revenue streams for companies, particularly in the food & hospitality industries. They diversify revenue streams outside the four walls of a restaurant by creating new channels of revenue in the areas of organic expansion, franchising, product development and licensing. They create this growth for their clients through their process of strategic consulting, management support and investment.

Company website

Lauren Fernandez, Principal and Founder, The Fernandez Company

Lauren Fernandez, Principal and Founder, The Fernandez Company

Lauren is the founder of The Fernandez Company, the culmination of nearly two decades as a trusted brand consultant and legal advisor with all kinds of clients, from start-ups to multinational companies, to private equity and investment firms.

She consults with companies in all aspects of restaurant and franchise development, brand licensing, product development, and market implementation. Lauren is an expert in multi-national product development and commercialization in the heavily regulated food, alcohol, pharmaceutical, and medical industries.

As a co-founder and investor in Origin Development Group, Ms. Fernandez has been both a multi-unit franchisee and brand developer, serving as a strategic growth partner for companies such as Chicken Salad Chick®. Lauren also served as the General Counsel for FOCUS Brands where she led both the legal team and franchise administration and was instrumental in the rapid growth of the licensing program.

Prior to joining FOCUS Brands, Lauren was part of an elite team at Novartis/CIBA VISION that successfully launched the company’s first new product in over a decade. She started her career in one of Atlanta’s most respected Intellectual Property Boutiques, Gardner Groff.

Lauren holds an undergraduate degree from Stetson University, as well as a Juris Doctorate and MBA from Emory University. She serves on the Advisory Board for the Atlanta Community Food Bank.  She also is a dedicated fundraiser for The Leukemia & Lymphoma Society and was named the 2015 Woman of the Year by the Atlanta Chapter.  She is a native of the Tampa Bay area but has lived in the Atlanta area for nearly two decades.

LinkedIn

Mike Blake, Brady Ware & Company

Mike Blake, Host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series

Michael Blake is the host of the Decision Vision podcast series and a Director of Brady Ware & Company. Mike specializes in the valuation of intellectual property-driven firms, such as software firms, aerospace firms, and professional services firms, most frequently in the capacity as a transaction advisor, helping clients obtain great outcomes from complex transaction opportunities. He is also a specialist in the appraisal of intellectual properties as stand-alone assets, such as software, trade secrets, and patents.

Mike has been a full-time business appraiser for 13 years with public accounting firms, boutique business appraisal firms, and an owner of his own firm. Prior to that, he spent 8 years in venture capital and investment banking, including transactions in the U.S., Israel, Russia, Ukraine, and Belarus.

Brady Ware & Company

Brady Ware & Company is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm which helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality. Brady Ware services clients nationally from its offices in Alpharetta, GA; Columbus and Dayton, OH; and Richmond, IN. The firm is growth-minded, committed to the regions in which they operate, and most importantly, they make significant investments in their people and service offerings to meet the changing financial needs of those they are privileged to serve. The firm is dedicated to providing results that make a difference for its clients.

Decision Vision Podcast Series

Decision Vision is a podcast covering topics and issues facing small business owners and connecting them with solutions from leading experts. This series is presented by Brady Ware & Company. If you are a decision-maker for a small business, we’d love to hear from you. Contact us at decisionvision@bradyware.com and make sure to listen to every Thursday to the Decision Vision podcast.

Past episodes of Decision Vision can be found at decisionvisionpodcast.com. Decision Vision is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX®.

Connect with Brady Ware & Company:

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:01] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast series focusing on critical business decisions. Brought to you by Brady Ware & Company. Brady Ware is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm that helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality.

Mike Blake: [00:00:20] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast giving you, the listener, clear vision to make great decisions. In each episode, we discuss the process of decision making on a different topic from the business owners’ or executives’ perspective. We aren’t necessarily telling you what to do, but we can put you in a position to make an informed decision on your own and understand when you might need help along the way.

Mike Blake: [00:00:39] My name is Mike Blake, and I’m your host for today’s program. I’m a director at Brady Ware & Company, a full-service accounting firm based in Dayton, Ohio, with offices in Dayton; Columbus, Ohio; Richmond, Indiana; and Alpharetta, Georgia. Brady Ware is sponsoring this podcast, which is being recorded in Atlanta per social distancing protocols. If you’d like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. If you like this podcast, please subscribe on your favorite podcast aggregator, and please consider leaving a review of the podcast as well.

Mike Blake: [00:01:13] So, we’re sort of continuing an impromptu mini-series here about how the workplace has changed and is changing as a result of the pandemic, and what we’re seeing in this trans-pandemic period as more people become vaccinated and the economy continues to reopen and resume, or achieve some semblance of normalcy. In the last few weeks, we’ve covered talking about hiring people with criminal records, we’ve talked about hiring people with disabilities. Last week, we published a conversation on attending and sponsoring live events.

Mike Blake: [00:02:01] And today, we’re going to talk about the labor force a little bit from a different angle, and that is changing careers. Should I change careers? And the labor market is behaving in a way that most of us have not seen in our lifetimes. I can’t remember anything even approaching this since maybe the dotcom bubble of the late ’90s. But even this, I think, frankly, is a different animal because it’s much more economy-wide as opposed to technology-specific. And what we’re seeing – at least what I’m seeing – is that our society’s relationship with work has changed. And I don’t think any of us really saw this coming to this extent.

Mike Blake: [00:02:49] Now, there’s a notion that there were some canaries in the coal mine. Labor force participation has been on the decline for the last decade or so. But really not to this extent. I think most of us, myself included – I’m certainly no great theoretical mind here – thought that once we all had the opportunity to return to work that we would do just that. You know, we’ve heard about everything from Zoom fatigue, to isolation depression, to everything in between. And now, instead, we’re finding ourselves with labor shortages. We’re finding that people are demanding more to be enticed to go back into the workforce.

Mike Blake: [00:03:40] And I think a lot of people, frankly, have simply rearranged their priorities. They’ve said, “Look, life is too short and I’m willing to make a little bit less, maybe even a lot less. I’m willing to adjust my lifestyle or our lifestyle of two income family going to one in order for us to build the lives that we want.” And that’s putting employers and business owners in a little bit of a bind. So, like, you can put a gun to people’s head and force them to go back to work.

Mike Blake: [00:04:09] And one of the other dynamics that I think is changing or is occurring – and I think it is a good thing economy-wide even though I think that there are clearly some industries that are a bit victimizes and a little bit flatfooted, I think, for fair – is, I think, people are also changing careers. They’ve taken the time that they had in the last year, whether they were laid off, they were furloughed, forced to get out of the workforce because they had family care obligations or health concerns or whatnot, and happily, instead of just sort of sitting around and watching Jeopardy reruns or whatever they do on daytime TV – do they do soap operas anymore? I have no idea. I don’t miss them.

Mike Blake: [00:04:51] But, anyway, you know, people are now retooling to assume a different career or maybe the first career they’ve had in their lives. And so, I think the topic of changing careers in this environment is particularly timely because, you know, my life experience tells me that for every one person that’s changed or is changing their career, there are another five or six out there that are actively thinking about it.

Mike Blake: [00:05:21] And I’ll leave with this before I introduce our guest. I saw quote actually this morning by Adam Grant, who is the author of a fantastic book that I read earlier this year called Atomic Habits, and many other important business books. And he’s a professor and a researcher of organizational theory at Wharton. But he wrote that, “It’s better to lose the past two years of progress than to waste the next 20.” I thought that was kind of profound. And if you look at the data, the average U.S. worker may expect to have something like 11 jobs in their lifetimes. But how many people actually change careers? That data is pretty sketchy and all. I saw numbers out there, there’s nothing I thought was sufficiently robust that I want to quote it. But I’m sure people don’t change careers 11 times in their lifetimes. But we are very fluid work sources is the point.

Mike Blake: [00:06:11] So, joining us to talk about this – she’s a recidivist. This is her second time on the program – is Lauren Fernandez of the Fernandez Company. At the Fernandez Company, they generate new revenue streams for companies, particularly in the food and hospitality industries. They diversify revenue streams outside the four walls of a restaurant by creating new channels of revenue in the areas of organic expansion, franchising, product development, and licensing. They create this growth for their clients through their process of strategic consulting, management support, and investment.

Mike Blake: [00:06:45] Lauren is the founder of the Fernandez Company. The culmination of over a decade of practice as a trusted brand consultant and legal adviser with all kinds of clients, from startups to multinational companies. Before forming the Fernandez Company, Lauren served as the general counsel for Focus Brands, where she was instrumental in the rapid growth of licensing program. She holds an undergraduate degree from Stetson University and a JD and an MBA from Emory University. She serves on the advisory board for the Atlanta Community Food Bank, and is a dedicated fundraiser for the Leukemia and Lymphoma Society, and was named 2015 Woman of the Year by them for raising nearly $95,000 in less than three months for cancer research. She’s a native of the Tampa Bay area but has lived in the Atlanta area for over 15 years. Lauren Fernandez, welcome back to the program.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:07:29] Hey, Mike. Thanks for having me back.

Mike Blake: [00:07:31] So, I’d love you just to start and tell us kind of in your own words, what is the background for your own career change? You know, I only learned recently – and, again, one of the fun parts about this program is I learn things about people, sometimes people I’ve known for a lot of years and things just never came up. But I learned that you, in fact, started out as an attorney before you became the restaurant maven that you are. Tell us about that origin story. How did that all come to be?

Lauren Fernandez: [00:08:05] So, I knew I wanted to be a JD/MBA. I knew I wanted to go to law school, but was pretty adamant on going to a school that had a top 20 MBA and law program. And entering several of them chose oddly enough, it was like birds singing, tulips everywhere. It was just a beautiful April spring day when I visited here and it made the Northeastern schools I was looking at pale by comparison.

Mike Blake: [00:08:34] Clearly, you don’t have allergies, but go ahead.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:08:36] I’m constantly on Claritin, actually point of fact. But I really enjoyed my visit to Atlanta. It was relatively close to my home base in Florida. And here I ended up, and I’ve been here for over 19 years. And so, my journey is a little bit about the balance between my law degree and my MBA. And in fact, when I finished the program at Emory in 2006, it was a tough time. The economy was already starting to tank a little bit.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:09:05] And I got some really good advice from another in-house counsel who was also a JD/MBA and she said, “Listen. When you leave, if you decide to go practice marketing, you’re going to miss an opportunity to be apprenticed at a law firm and really learn what it is to practice law. And it’s very hard to go back and do that later if you choose a law career later.” And that couldn’t have been more right.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:09:29] I was extremely fortunate to land at Gardner Groff, a very storied and long tenured boutique intellectual property firm here in Atlanta. And they brought me on and taught me the basics of intellectual property, and litigation, and licensing, and product development. And for that, I am eternally grateful because that’s a huge investment in young lawyers to have to train them up. And I was there for a little over three or four years before I moved in-house.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:09:55] And that was the first of many steps I took in my career to move closer and closer to the business of my clients. Because as an attorney, I always viewed my role as really understanding the business so I could put the proper context around the problem and help them navigate into white space, not necessarily to make decisions for my clients, even with respect to the legal risk, but more or less risk management and kind of moving into white space.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:10:24] And so, I landed at a division of Novartis here in Atlanta, which at the time was called CIBA Vision, and is now Alcon post-merger. And I became their associate general counsel and global head of trademarks and domain names. So, they took two roles and smooshed them together for me. I was just really so fortunate to land right at the exact time they were doing a major product dev. It was the first time they had pulled a product dev of R&D in ten years. So, I got to be part of a billion dollar product launch in over 148 countries, which is right in my wheelhouse. And that experience was phenomenal.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:11:02] But as things happen, you know, the company changed. We went through a merger. And I was working through kind of what my next step would be within Novartis and kind of talking to them about that when I got a phone call one day from an MBA friend of mine who, you know, we have a good working relationship. We were also good friends outside of work. And she would call me from time to time just to ask a trademark question, a licensing question, what have you. And she said, “Would you come and meet with our CEO?” And I said, “Yeah. Sure. What’s going on?” And she said, “Well, I sort of printed out your LinkedIn profile and he wants to talk to you.” And I was like, “Oh, okay.” So, that was the origin story of how I ended up at Focus Brands.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:11:40] Focus, at the time, was looking for, not only in-house legal counsel, but also someone who had specific expertise in product development and licensing to help grow their program. And so, when I went to Focus and made that decision, I was leaving a former career behind. Which, for most lawyers, that’s a very lucrative golden handcuffs all the way in-house job and working for a phenomenal company. I loved working there.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:12:03] But when I made the leap, I made it specifically for one reason. I met with the CEO at the time, Russ Umphenour. I was very compelled that he saw me as a business person. And that he wanted to invest in me and teach me the ropes of restaurants and franchising. And really felt like it was important for me to get training. And so, I went over. I met the executive team, the rest of the brand presidents, the rest of the C Suite. And I thought, “If I’m going to make this jump, I’m going to make it to here because this is where I’m going to get the training that I need to really be in an industry that’s more aligned with who I am personally and professionally.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:12:40] And so, it wasn’t too much of a leap as an attorney because most intellectual property matters is fully translatable. And to the extent that you do product dev and it’s in regulated markets, that’s Food and Drug Administration. So, drugs being obviously a little harder in some cases to get through for approval. So, moving over to food was a pretty easy leap in that respect. So, off I went to Focus and that was yet another kind of step in my career. And I think I got a lot of flack from that from people who were in my peer group were like, “What are you doing leaving pharma? That’s ridiculous.” And I said, “No. I like the runway I have with this company. It makes sense.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:13:19] So, I went over to Focus. I headed up their legal department for over three years. Grew it from me and a part-time paralegal to a team of over 24 people. Ran the legal department and the franchise administration, at the same time that was helping grow the licensing program and a lot of their international deals. So, it was a wonderful place to learn from other executives. I just really had a phenomenal talent group around me and the peers there. And I can’t speak highly enough about that leadership.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:13:50] And, you know, again, things just change. So, about three years in, we had a leadership change and things just got shuffled. And it was just starting to feel like that time. I was getting calls, recruiters were calling. And it was just an interesting moment. It was a pivot point in my career. And I had been a general counsel at that point for three years. And I was in my mid-30s and I thought, “I have really checked the box on my legal career. I feel, really, like I’ve done it all. I really want to move more into the business side.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:14:21] And one of the things that kept happening, Mike, was I was going on these interviews for, you know, publicly traded food companies, restaurant companies. I was meeting with CEOs, meeting with boards. And their vision of what a general counsel would look like and talk like was very different than how I was used to operating – more involved in the business, engaged in finding white space, brainstorming, really charting a path for the company. And it was just making me feel really sick to my stomach. I just had this like really bad pit about it. Even though the jobs are all super lucrative and really interesting, it didn’t really feel aligned with my compass at that point.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:15:01] And I’ll never forget this. I went out and had lunch one day with my former CEO-mentor and I told him, “This isn’t lining up. I’m having trouble finding another CEO who looked at me the way that you did and treated me like a business partner.” And he said, “Yeah. Kind of like good luck with that.” And he said, “Why don’t you own a restaurant? Like, why don’t you actually operate a restaurant? That’s something you haven’t done.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:15:27] And, Mike, in the industry, a lot of restaurant executives come up in the industry. And I had a very different background. I have a college degree and two postgraduate degrees. And, yeah, I’d worked in hospitality and restaurants. But, you know, summer jobs and never, like, actually really gotten handed to me in a restaurant, so to speak. And, you know, I took that advice and it stuck with me and I couldn’t shake it. So, I started, literally, shopping for franchises. I had some money to invest and I thought, “Okay. Let me find one that maybe I can buy by myself and I’ll operate it as a business. And then, I can hire someone to help me run it.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:16:08] And so, around that time, I had started the Fernandez Company as our consulting firm, which still exists. We do a lot of consulting work around product development, lines of revenue around licensing, and product dev especially for restaurant companies. And I had a decent client base and things were going, but I still wanted to kind of invest in a restaurant. So, I’d been looking for about a month. And I bumped into – through a mutual friend – an investor who actually ended up becoming a business partner of mine. And we formed Origin Development Group for the sole purpose of going out to find restaurants to invest in, and to grow, and operate, and, hopefully, realize some benefits out of that.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:16:52] So, we started Origin, and I became a restaurant operator within, maybe, six months. We ended up closing a deal to purchase three Chicken Salad Chick restaurants and the entire territory for Atlanta, Augustine, and Athens for the brand. And three years later, we had 11. We had three nontraditional locations and we had three more locations under development when we ended up selling the entire company’s assets, in fact, all the Chicken Salad assets, over back to Chicken Salad Chicks parent company. So, it was very much like a slow progression and then a sudden progression into restaurant operations.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:17:35] But what I will say from that was, every step that I took in my career was towards the goal of getting more and more and more onto the business side. And I think, for me, one of the important risks that was certainly worth it with Origin was, I had ownership in the company. So, I wanted to be able to help steer the boat. I had an assumption of the development obligations, like actually opening restaurants, but also the daily operations of the restaurants themselves.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:18:02] So, that was certainly an education by experience. And I learned more in that three year period than I think I did in my entire four years at Emory. And that is saying a lot, because they’ve packed a lot into that for years at Emory. Because I think there’s nothing that can really substitute when you are losing money in a restaurant and you’re trying to figure out where you can cut and make sacrifices and drive profit margin is the most real world education of a profit and loss statement. And, suddenly, all of these things that I had learned in grad school were coming so alive for me and so real. And so, they were tools in my belt that I hadn’t really used and really those muscles I hadn’t flexed before. And really being able to put them into good use in our restaurants was extraordinary.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:18:51] And then, just continuing to learn. Like, we had great support in the field from the brand. We had a wonderful franchise business consultant. The ops team was fantastic. So, I was just like a sponge. I constantly was asking every manager, “Why do you do that that way? Who taught you that? Like, tell me more.” And I just became almost annoying in how much I was asking why questions to get them to teach me. And I think that that just takes a little bit of humility. But I really was hungry to learn a little bit more about restaurant operations and to be a really good operator.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:19:28] And where that part of the story ended, and that brings us to where I took a sabbatical to help figure out what I wanted to do next. But that was the progression, really, from intellectual property attorney to restaurant owner. You know, of course, until we get to the place where we’re operating Full Course today, my restaurant development and investment firm.

Mike Blake: [00:19:53] So, you know, so many interesting things to kind of go back and pick on, and we will. The first question I have is, what made you want to get into law in the first place? And the reason I ask that question is because the follow up question is going to be, I seem to know a lot of people that trained to be lawyers and then didn’t last very long in the industry. One of my closest friends, he was my RA in college just moved to New Zealand, but he lived here in Atlanta for a long time. And after getting his law degree, it took him about a year before he went into technology, basically. So, the first part of the question is, why did you want to get into law? And then, we’ll come back to the second part in a second.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:20:38] Yeah. Great question. Wow. So, throughout high school, my parents were very much like, “Hey, look. You’re good at a lot of stuff, but let’s try some different things so that you can narrow it down.” I think if you ask them, they were probably super concerned that I would go and try and do too much at college, which happened anyway. But, you know, I did a whole summer with marine biology, like rescuing turtles and dolphins and doing necropsies. It was an experience. And then, I really loved architecture and construction. I did a whole summer with Habitat for Humanity.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:21:17] So, my parents very much encouraged me to have practical experience. And one of those experiences was specifically working or summer interning in high school with a law firm. And I think it was actually my dad who suggested = he’s a physician. And my mom, at the time, was an R.N. and working on her PhD in mental health and counseling. We have all this medicine in the family. And I was kind of like, “I don’t know what to do, but I don’t think I want to do that.” And my dad said, “You know, you’re in moot court. You do all this public speaking stuff. You’ve done all these competitions at science fair where, arguably, the science is great but what you’re really good at is pitching what you’ve done. Why don’t you go intern with one of our lawyer friends?” And that was really where it started.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:22:06] And I just fell in love with it. I mean, I loved the bates numbering, like this numbering on. I’m so organized and really kind of compulsively so. So, they had this big litigation going on. I got to, like, Xerox stuff and collate things. And I was just asking questions about the case the whole time. And it kind of sucked me in. At the time, I was an unabashed, like, completely obsessed with Law and Order, which is criminal law. But it seemed to be a good fit. And everyone who knew me was like, “Oh, yeah. Obviously, she’s going to be a lawyer.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:22:36] So, what was really funny was, I did get a scholarship as part of my undergrad to go prelaw. But when it came down to it and I took the LSAT and everything was groovy, my mom became pretty critically ill and had lymphoma. And so, I took a year between college and grad school and kind of just put everything on pause. And in that time, 9/11 happened. So, we really had to do as a family, I mean, with my mom being sick, and with 9/11, and the economy suffering as a result, there was a lot going on.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:23:13] And so, I had a chance to reevaluate what I wanted to do. And, really, when it came down to it, I had already taken the LSAT. It was fairly easy for me to take the GMAT. I think that’s what it was, the GMAT. And start applying to JD/MBA programs because I had a very narrow window of time. We had come back from cancer treatment with my mom. They had just allowed air travel again. It was just a very crazy time.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:23:36] And I remember sitting there with her typewriter – people, a typewriter because this is back in, like, 2001 or 2002. We’re sitting there like banging out the applications on the typewriter. And I remember her saying to me, “You have to apply to a JD/MBA program. You just have to.” She’s like, “You’re going to be behind a desk running a company someday. You’re going to want that MBA. Don’t just pick schools that have both really good programs.” And I was like, “Okay.” And so, we narrowed it down and applied to, like, five or six schools. And that was just really what got it going.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:24:14] And I’m going to be honest, Mike, I got to law school. In about three months in, my mom got sick again. And I was away from my family and I had a complete meltdown. I mean, something had happened at school, you know, one of those classic stories of someone hiding a book in the library actually happened. I was like, “This is ridiculous. Like, these people are crazy.” And I called my lawyer-mentor friend back at home, and I said, “Should I leave? Like, I don’t know that this is really for me.” And he said, “No. You should stay. You should see this through. The first year is always the hardest. Just see it through. Next year, you can start your MBA program. It’s going to be okay.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:24:56] And so, I really struggled. My biggest problem was I loved my MBA program so much. And this is after I had already enjoyed my law training. And there’s a special product commercialization and development track at Emory called the Tiger Program, which I think I might have been the first or the second graduating class.

Mike Blake: [00:25:16] I’ve been a teacher for them.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:25:17] Yeah. Okay. Great. Full circle here. I love the program. At the time, it was run by Margo Bagley, who’s phenomenal. And I really loved my law experience there. And then, I love the business school even more. So, for me, it was just like popping out of that program, I was like, “Which path do I take?” And as I mentioned earlier, I ultimately made the decision to become an apprentice, effectively, lawyer as a junior lawyer and associate at a law firm. So, hat’s how I ended up in law to start with.

Mike Blake: [00:25:52] So, I’m curious – this is only relevant to a segment of the audience, but it’s my show, so I got to ask the questions. And that question is, I seem to see a lot more people change careers from law than from any other professional field that I can think of. I’m curious if your experience is like that, too. And if so, why do you think that is?

Lauren Fernandez: [00:26:17] So many thoughts here, but I’ll try and keep it short. So, first and foremost, the United States pumps out, like, four times as many lawyers every year as any other country in the world. So, it’s my personal opinion that we pump out a lot of lawyers. There’s a lot of adults who go to law school. And it, you know, seems like a professional career that can be translated into multiple different things. And for reasons that you just mentioned, like, I know multiple attorneys who never sat for the bar, or sat for the bar and practiced for a year and then transitioned to something else.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:26:55] And so, I think there’s a bit of a mythology out there that you can use a law degree for whatever you want. Well, true. But the law degree also costs three years of your life and you’re roughly $200,000, probably even more now.

Mike Blake: [00:27:09] Probably more now, yeah.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:27:09] I’m just throwing that out there. I mean, of course, there’s state schools and everything. And I had scholarship money. So, it is what it is. But I think there’s a cost benefit analysis that needs to happen there. I remember my dad, I was 21, 22, sitting down with me and forced me to make an Excel spreadsheet on the ROI of me going to Emory over another school that was literally going to pay me in addition to paying everything else, is going to pay me $11,000 a year to go to school there. And he was like, “Prove to me why you need to do this.” And I did the math for him and I showed him my payoff timeline and all this kind of stuff, which, of course in the economy that ensued was not really what happened. But that’s a story for another day.

Mike Blake: [00:27:53] No way you could’ve know that.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:27:54] I don’t regret it at all. I love my Emory experience. I’m a huge proponent of the school. Just to say that. I do think that that’s number one, is, there is a lot of lawyers that are kind of getting pumped out into the market. So, that’s kind of number one. Number two is, in the United States – and I’m going to just compare this to Spain, where I have a little bit more, like, firsthand knowledge – the process of going to law school doesn’t necessarily teach you practical skills as an attorney. That is shifting a little bit more as we get a little more progressive. But it’s still very Socratic method, the same first year for everyone.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:28:34] And so, it is considered unusual to have a very heavy practicum load where it’s practical application of law and teaching you actual legal skills. So, when you come out of law school, you don’t even know what you don’t know. I mean, you basically know how to take the bar. And that’s about it. So, true to my form, when I was in high school and in college, I took every internship opportunity that was offered to me at Emory. I think I had a total of four, maybe even five, that I got credit for and was able to actually get my foot in the door at a couple of companies. I worked at Cingular Wireless, which then became AT&T. I worked at Coke twice on the legal side and on the marketing side, and various other places.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:29:19] But, you know, I don’t think that we really invest time in training lawyers how to be lawyers. You pop out and then you basically have another two to three years of learning how to be a lawyer. And that means a firm usually has to invest in you to really give you that level of training and expertise. So, imagine coming out of grad school. You’ve got all this debt. You know, you are sitting in a chair in a firm, probably not making the cushy salary that you thought. And your life is, literally, you draft a document and it’s blood red with red lines because that’s the accepted method of teaching young lawyers how to be a lawyer. You red line the heck out of their work and you go over it with them. If you’re lucky, you have a partner who will, like, review it with you and coach you and mentor you.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:30:08] And, you know, every single minute of your day is accounted for. You have a billable rate. You have to bill a certain number of hours a day, and that has to be collected dollars that they’re not writing off as a firm. So, that’s your efficiency ratio. So, you’ve just effectively come out of a three year program. You have a graduate degree. You’ve got a square after — for being those ratios. And it’s just facts. I mean, it’s just how law firms make money. It’s how the system works. And, now, there are a variety of different models that are different these days. But that can be a very soul crushing experience.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:30:55] I just will speak for myself. I had a great firm. I had wonderful mentors. But, literally, two years in, I was sick to my stomach with the stress, literally. And it wasn’t until I went in-house that that went away. And the only other time in my life I’ve ever had that feeling of, like, extreme exhaustion and anxiety was when I was operating 11 restaurants and trying to juggle too much. And I kind of burned myself out. This is, you know, 15 years later. But that is a very stressful environment. And you’re being paid to put your opinion out. And it’s always a judgment call, right?

Lauren Fernandez: [00:31:38] It’s never black and white. That’s why lawyers have a job. They’re shades of gray all in the middle. And that’s why lawyers are important in what they do in assessing and managing risk for clients. And especially in intellectual property, where there’s very clear deadlines on patents and trademark filings for copyright matters, there’s always the looming monster of malpractice. So, I think that this has sort of created this blender, maybe, or it just chews people up. And some people thrive in those environments. You know, my brother and my sister-in-law are still attorneys and practice. And I have plenty of friends and peers who still work and practice in the industry.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:32:28] But I think there is a side to it where it’s not necessarily aligned with what a lot of people think it’s going to be. And there’s also that perpetuation of like, “Oh, I just finished college.” I have heard this said, law schools are very accepting and embracing of applicants. You don’t have to have any experience. Meanwhile, over in my business program at Emory, I was probably the least experienced business person that got into our program. And I already had a full two pager business resume that had nothing to do with law. And so, it’s just a jump from college to law school. And so, I think that’s part of it, too. I’m sure I missed some things in there.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:33:14] It’s sad to me because I think the reality is, there’s a high rate of depression amongst lawyers, alcoholism, substance abuse, and a lot of other mental health issues that, as an industry, we don’t really talk about very well. And I think that’s really sad because, I think, fundamentally, it’s a byproduct of what the kind of institutional structures of whether it’s a firm or in-house – I don’t know that it makes the difference – it’s just kind of part of how the profession works, if you know what I mean. And especially in the United States. I don’t think that it’s universally true. I’m speaking about the United States here.

Mike Blake: [00:33:53] I wonder how many people, too, go to law school because they were good students, but they don’t know what to do next.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:34:01] I mean, if I had to guess, I think it was roughly a fourth of my law school class. No joke. And I think it would be really interesting to go back now and kind of look at where they all are. And I do follow, like, a number of them on Facebook or LinkedIn. But I have noticed that it’s my JD/MBA colleagues who are the first to jump, you know, who either never practiced law or practiced to a point and then made a successful leap over into other business ventures. Oh, for sure. For sure.

Mike Blake: [00:34:33] So, let’s talk about that transition, and your story is interesting. And correct me if I’m wrong – but, one, it sounds fairly gradual. And the second, it sounds fairly organic. It didn’t sound like you had this many epiphany moments where you said, “I got to get out of A and then move into B.” Or it may have been parse to the case, I suppose, moving from billable to in-house counsel. But the rest of it sort of sounded like people were pursuing you for your skills and then kind of moving you away from practicing law directly into doing other things. Is that a fair way to characterize it?

Lauren Fernandez: [00:35:12] I think I was always looking for those opportunities. And so, one of the key things I want to say here for anyone who’s thinking of making a big leap, a big leap is really a big leap because you’re going drastically from point A to point D. And so, I knew that I wanted to get out of the law eventually and into the more business side. You know, when I was at Novartis, that could have been product moving over to product dev, that could have been moving over into the marketing department. I’m sort of was always analyzing other opportunities to kind of make that lateral move over. Because in my mind, you want to take all the aggregate skills that you’ve developed and just sort of make a lateral step over or up to help get you to the end goal.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:36:00] So, you’re right, I didn’t, like, leave Novartis and go, “Oh, I’m going to go over into Focus. And then, someday I’m going to own a restaurant.” No. I mean, I learned a lot when I was at Focus. And I saw all these franchisees, like, buying restaurants and just absolutely crushing it and just doing great as business people. And I thought, “Well, there’s something to this,” which was just sort of in the back of my mind.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:36:21] And then, when opportunities presented themselves for me to be able to do that and be more entrepreneurial, it made sense to kind of take that kind of risk. Because, to me, it was a step over as opposed to being a giant jump from A to Z. It was just so much more. It does seem more organic in that respect. But I think it was sort of always the plan. And I think the key to that, Mike, is, I’m very clear on what I’m good at, but I’m also really clear on what I’m not good at.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:36:51] And it’s something that, I think, when people are very confident and put together and poised and you look at this impressive resume, whether you see it on LinkedIn or wherever, you go, “Oh, she must have really had a plan for that.” No. But I knew myself. And, humbly, I also know what I’m not capable of and what I’m not good at. And that’s something that I used to build really great teams around me because I play to my weaknesses and their strengths, and I know how to hire for that and really how to energize and motivate people. And that’s been something that’s helped me kind of make those big junctures feel more like a sidestep.

Mike Blake: [00:37:30] You know, so that’s really interesting, the way that you characterized that. So, an overarching thread that strikes me that I think is potentially very instructive is, when you are making these career changes – I think they sound plural to me. You may disagree, but this is semantic — you are not necessarily running away from something as you are running towards something else.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:38:00] Yeah. But I just hate to characterize negatively. I’m pragmatic, but I’m very optimistic. So, I’m never going to cast the law or the practice of law in a negative light. Let’s talk about that. So, you know, there was a moment when I was sitting at my desk in Focus, we had had a change in upper leadership, and it was really late at night. And I was one of two people left in the building. And I thought to myself, “What am I doing? Is this really what I want with my life?” Really, like just had that moment, which we may call an epiphany that I was like, “You know, maybe this isn’t worth it anymore. Why am I working this hard? What am I trying to prove?”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:38:44] And, I think, if I had to really, really identify, there have been two major jumps for me. One was leaving the law and kind of starting a consulting firm and opening restaurants. And this next one, where I started my own restaurant development and investment firm. And in both of those moments, I had to let go of what everyone else thought of me. I had to let go of what everyone else thought my next career step should be. I had to not give a You-Know-What about what the next thing on my LinkedIn profile was going to be. And have the confidence that whatever I chose next was going to be, not only a learning experience, but a great experience and adventure for me.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:39:23] And that seemed more exciting to me than sitting at a desk. And I’m not going to lie, in that moment, I did some math. And I thought, you know, you think the salary is great and you think the title is great, and then you realize how hard your working is essentially less money than I was making in college, which is crazy to think about. And it wasn’t about that, though. It was just sort of having a validation moment that, “Yeah. Maybe I need to start thinking of other things.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:39:53] And then, I have my lifeboat. They’re like my informal board of directors for Lauren. And I started putting calls into people and saying, “Hey, listen. What would you think if I told you I was going to start a consulting firm and sort of just slowly not practice law anymore?” And they were like, “Yes. You should do that. You’re good. You’ve checked the box. Your career is great. Like, no one would ever say that you left the law too early. I think you’d be great at it. You should do that.” And I started getting a lot of thumbs ups and like, “Yeah. Do it.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:40:26] And then, you know, I did it, and it was scary. And then, I invested in some restaurants with a partner, and that was scary, too. Because I think you have to have the courage to accept that you’re kind of boldly going where you haven’t gone before. And so, you leave the comfort of being an expert and at the top of your game to not really knowing how to fix a walk-in cooler in a restaurant. It’s this big. That’s big. Like, there’s something very humbling about taking the law degree down off the wall in an executive office, putting it away in a closet, and putting on a hairnet and clogs. And that’s literally what my life became. And I did it.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:41:03] I did it on purpose because I wanted that experience and I wanted to really be able to say, as we do all the time now with Full Course, like, we’ve walked the walk. We understand it. We speak operator. We’ve been there. We’ll be there with you. So, we’re not just investing in your restaurant, we’ve actually run them ourselves. So, all of those things just to say, Mike, like, yeah, maybe we are kind of running from some things, but I think I’d rather think of it as running towards the runway. Sometimes you just hit a wall and you’re like, “I’ve done all I can do here.” And things change in companies, too. And I wouldn’t consider that necessarily as much running away as just sort of – let’s just use the phrase – finding white space or runway.

Mike Blake: [00:41:49] Good. Well, I mean, that’s exactly how your story comes across. And, you know, to me, I think that’s an important mentality. Because when you are running to something, frankly, I think that’s a mindset that puts you in a position to make a better decision. If you’re running away from something, you’re in crisis, you have emotional baggage that, I think, is associated with running away that interferes with a good intellectual decision process, and it can lead to mistakes. It doesn’t mean there weren’t negative things that were kind of nudging you towards something. It doesn’t mean that you are leaving one plane and having to move to another plane, so to speak.

Mike Blake: [00:42:34] But I do think that you’re mentality that, again, it wasn’t about running away from something. But here’s another opportunity, I’m going to grab it. I think that’s an underrated and underappreciated driver behind a successful versus a less than successful career change.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:42:54] I couldn’t have said it better. And I think the scariest moment for me was, when I literally had to create my own runway. So, I mentioned earlier I took a sabbatical. Which, anyone who knows me, I’ve been working nonstop since I was probably, about, 14. And when we sold the company, I was pretty late and 39. It was the end of December ’18, I was still 39. I was about to turn 40. And I told everyone publicly I was going to take three months off. But my husband and I knew that I was actually taking off six months to a year. And I took the full year. And I’m actually so enormously proud of that. Like, it actually gives me a little bit of a teary eyed moment.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:43:40] Because I think when you take a minute to really think about what you’ve been through, and to put some parentheses on it, and to really think hard about what you’ve learned and what you still need to learn, and what was humbling about it, where can you still grow. And having that moment, which was a year, which I’m so blessed I had that opportunity. But I think sometimes just taking that moment.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:44:08] I’m a huge fan of Ina Garten, the Barefoot Contessa. And she just reminds me of, my mom, just everything about her spirit and her personality. Plus, I love the way she cooks. And so, I went to one of her book signings and she said something to me. Literally, I was still a restaurant operator at the time that I saw the horizon because she said something so profound. It just smacked me upside the head. And I took out my phone and I started taking notes.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:44:32] And what she described was the process of selling the shop and the restaurant, Barefoot Contessa. And selling it to new owners and not knowing what to do with herself. And so, she rented this office space upstairs because she had to consult with them still. And she would just go in there and sit there and do the New York Times crossword puzzle, and read old cookbooks. And, you know, she was just basically sitting there at their beck and call. But she made a routine for herself to go in and just kind of sit there so that she could let inspiration come to her.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:45:06] And in that moment, she looked over at a coffee table and four of her favorite cookbooks were on the coffee table. And they were all published by the same publisher. And she thought, “Well, I own all the recipes. I’ve just documented them for them downstairs. Let me just fire off an email and see what happens.” She fires off an email. And the next day, they’re like, “When can you start? And here’s your advance.” And that’s how she started her first cookbook, which then led to a television show. Which, by the way, she said no to, like, four times. And then, her story of how they got her in front of a camera is hilarious, but I’ll save that for another day.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:45:45] But the moral of her story was, sometimes you just have to take time and make the time to let the next step come to you. And that year, I was probably about six months in when I really started seeing the problems that I was having as an operator, and a restaurant developer, and understanding the financing in the middle, and kind of how all of those things work together was an endemic problem with restaurant growth in our industry. And that’s why a lot of one and two unit restaurants don’t ever make it to ten, and don’t make it from 10 to 20. And by the way, that’s where the exponential ROI is for restaurant owners. It’s not in a one-and-a-half multiple times profit margin when you sell one restaurant. It’s at 11X when you sell 10.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:46:36] So, really thinking through that problem and how I could help bring up other minorities and women in ownership in the industry. And I started brainstorming with my lifeboat, with my informal board of directors. Like, “Hey, if I started a company and its stated agenda was to fix X, Y, and Z problems, what would it look like and how would we start it?” And I had the luxury of six months to plan out what it was going to look like. And then, the pandemic happened. So, I had even more time to really think about what it was going to look like, what its mission and purpose was going to be. And to create that runway for, not just me, but for our team.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:47:22] And that is hands down the most exciting but terrifying thing that I’ve ever done in my career. Because, truthfully, it’s the first time I’ve made that side step into something that I fully created. Even when I was a consultant with Fernandez Company and we started that, like, I was doing what I was doing for Focus for, you know, other companies. Like, just basically helping them on their legal issues, helping them brainstorm about how to add more revenue to their business. It was consulting work. Yes, it wasn’t legal work. But it was not as big a step as this one over to Full Course. You know what I mean?

Lauren Fernandez: [00:48:03] So, I think that there’s some magic in kind of taking that pause and really reflecting on where you’ve come from, and where you want to go next. And really building out that runway, not just for you, but for the team that you want to bring with you.

Mike Blake: [00:48:20] So, let me pause a little bit and ask you a question about Full Course. Because what I’m hearing from you is that was the first transition that you made where you really were starting and embarking on something totally new or pretty much totally new. Some might call it starting at the bottom, I don’t like that term. But maybe a flat footed start is the best way to put it.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:48:45] So, you’ve been doing that for a while now and you have an interesting knack for timing, right? You became a lawyer in the worst job market for lawyers ever. It was the Hiroshima of the job market for lawyers. But, now, you’re doing that in the restaurant industry, too, right? I mean, they’re going through charitably a seismic shift. Are you yet comfortable in that role? Or if you are comfortable, how long did it sort of take you before you felt like, “I’ve transitioned into this role and this is now me.”

Lauren Fernandez: [00:49:18] Great question. So, we signed our first clients January 1st, and that was the day I took the law degree down off the wall.

Mike Blake: [00:49:29] No kidding.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:49:30] Yeah. It’s actually rolled up in my closet. And I had a personal thing with myself and I said this to anyone who kind of gave me crap for having my degrees up on the wall, because I have gotten crap for it over my career, believe it or not. It is, but not really. If you think about the industries I’ve worked in, not really. I mean, in Novartis, it was kind of a joke because there would be patent attorneys that we worked with who had, like, three PhDs. It’s just, like, crazy smart people in the company. But I would always tell people, “I’m taking them down when they’re paid for. So, if you want to write me a check, I’ll take them down for you right now.” And I’ve been saying that for 20 years – you know, 15, 20 years. So, they are, in fact, paid for and I’m very proud of that.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:50:16] But I took them down and I put them away. I took them out of their frames and I rolled them up. And I did that because I felt like I didn’t need anyone else’s approval of what I was doing. And for the first time in my career, I think I finally shed the last layer of needing anyone else’s permission or okay or blessing to do this. And that’s a really pivotal moment. I think a lot of us get stuck in worrying about what our parents think, what our spouses are going to think, what people are going to think if they look at a gap on their resume.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:50:47] I just spoke last week to an attorney who was concerned that jumping from job A to B in less than three years was going to be problematic. And I’m like, “Are you kidding me? Not in this environment. Certainly, not at your level of expertise. Like, that’s the kind of stuff we’re worried about when we were, like, baby lawyers. Like, come on now. Like, no.” So, I think that we carry those around and it’s so heavy. And you don’t take a pause to really think about you and what you’ve learned and give yourself credit for that. And where you want to go to really challenge yourself and maximize your talents and skills. You’re going to keep listening to all of that noise. And I think that that pause is so important. It really is.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:51:37] You know, my parents have said to me my entire life, “You have an extraordinary amount of talent and skill. But what we expect of you is that you use it in service to others. You use it to the best of your ability and in service to others.” And even for me, for years, I’m not going to lie, that was a lot of pressure. That was a lot of noise. And I had to let go of that, too. Because even though that was a really huge guiding principle for me my entire career, at the end of the day, it’s not what got me to where I am in this last jump. I think that really having that pause and thinking long and hard about where I felt led to take the next step was very important.

Mike Blake: [00:52:18] We’re talking to Lauren Fernandez. And the topic is, Should I change careers? We’ll have time for a couple more questions. But there’s so many that we could ask. But one I want to make sure to get out there is, is there anything that you might do differently in terms of how you made your decisions to change or evolve your career over time? Anything you might do differently?

Lauren Fernandez: [00:52:40] Wow. Yeah. I think there’s one thing that I realize now. I was very sheepish about self-promotion, about advocating for me within the company, advocating for me professionally within my peer group. I had no issue doing presentations if I was asked or going out and helping give information out and being a part of academia, if you will. Like, sort of the academic or intellectual pursuit of what I was doing as an attorney. And indeed recognized as an expert in both licensing, branding, co-branding, and in product development as an attorney in the space. And I’m very proud of that.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:53:26] But I think what I missed as an executive, especially comparing to where my peers are at, was, the attorneys are sometimes given the shaft even inside of a company where they’re a cost center. They don’t generate revenue for the company. You know, they want to be seen but not heard. You know, it’s kind of like the Imperial Death March when I walk in a room like, da, da, da. So, I think you kind of shrink a little bit. And I think that that’s unfortunate. Because, now, I realize that I missed so many opportunities to be of value to my MBA peers, to other minorities, other women in the industry, just by being present whether that’s in LinkedIn or in the industry events. You know, I did plenty of networking, but I don’t feel like I probably was as much of an advocate for myself as I should have been.

Lauren Fernandez: [00:54:30] So, if there’s one thing that I would do differently, I think I would have taken more opportunities to stick up for myself and probably, also, to advocate and to promote myself professionally, Because your reputation is important and it’s a lot of what you do on a regular basis and showing up and having integrity. But I think, obviously, there’s a part to this that you get lost in the noise unless you have something to say and you’re not afraid to say it. And I think that that fear sometimes, probably to be fair, got in the way of me really being out there.

Mike Blake: [00:55:07] Laura, this has been a great conversation. Again, I’ve learned so many neat things about you personally. I’m just going to be very selfish of the podcast, almost beside the point. But there’s a lot here that we could have covered, and didn’t. And I know you’ve got a business to run and a weekend to get to. But, you know, if any of our listeners have a question we didn’t cover that want to go deeper into something that we did, can they contact you? And if so, what’s the best way to do that?

Lauren Fernandez: [00:55:36] Yeah. Absolutely. I absolutely love taking calls to help anybody. I love to pay it forward and have on many occasions mentored young women, minorities, everybody. So, I’m happy to talk to anyone who’s interested in shifting careers into the restaurant industry, which I cannot advocate more, especially at this time, or leaving the law, whatever the topic may be. And you can reach me at fullcourse.com. You can actually book a meeting with me directly on our website. Or you can just email me directly at lauren@fullcourse.com.

Mike Blake: [00:56:12] That’s going to wrap it up for today’s program. I’d like to thank Lauren Fernandez so much for joining us and sharing her expertise with us.

Mike Blake: [00:56:19] We’ll be exploring a new topic each week, so please tune in so that when you’re faced with your next business decision, you have clear vision when making it. If you enjoy these podcasts, please consider leaving a review with your favorite podcast aggregator. It helps people find us that we can help them. If you like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. Once again, this is Mike Blake. Our sponsor is Brady Ware & Company. And this has been the Decision Vision podcast.

 

Tagged With: Brady Ware & Company, Focus Brands, franchise development, Lauren Fernandez, Mike Blake, restaurant ownership, The Fernandez Company

Decision Vision Episode 119: Should I Return to In-Person Events? – An Interview with David Walens, Exploring, Inc.

June 3, 2021 by John Ray

Exploring, Inc.
Decision Vision
Decision Vision Episode 119: Should I Return to In-Person Events? - An Interview with David Walens, Exploring, Inc.
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Exploring, Inc.

Decision Vision Episode 119: Should I Return to In-Person Events? – An Interview with David Walens, Exploring, Inc.

Is it the right time to go back to in-person events? Is it the right time to schedule these events and how will they look? David Walens, CEO of Exploring, Inc. shared his observations and projections for in-person events with host Mike Blake. Decision Vision is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

Exploring, Inc.

Exploring is the parent company of several unique, trailblazing Atlanta-based companies.Exploring Inc.

Their companies span a range of industries, from the exhibit and event industry to hospitality, commercial, retail, architectural, automotive, museum, and other markets.

What each Exploring company has in common, however, is a ceaseless focus on discovering truly innovative solutions and value for clients. In fact, that focus is what they look for when adding new companies to the Exploring family.

Exploring Inc. employs almost 180 people and operates in three locations, including a 150,000 square foot fabrication facility, providing a uniquely wide scope of capabilities and supported by a highly experienced, versatile, and talented team of metal fabricators, sculptors, artists, carpenters, painters, and printers. The rapidly growing company was founded in 1999 and includes ID3 Group, Chisel 3D, Atlantis Waterjet, Brumark, Shelmarc Carpets, and CGI Graphics. Exploring, Inc. has been named to the Inc. 500/5000 Inc. Magazine’s annual list of Fastest-Growing Private Companies in America six times in 2009, 2010, 2011, 2014, 2016, and 2018.

Company website | LinkedIn | Facebook

David Walens, CEO, Exploring, Inc.

Exploring, Inc.
David Walens, CEO, Exploring, Inc.

Dave has over 30 years of experience in developing and growing businesses. His ability to think creatively and strategically and his unwavering commitment to customer service are true differentiators. He has extensive experience in exhibit design and construction, event fabrication, graphic production, flooring production, and project management. This experience, combined with in-depth industry knowledge and expertise enables Dave to assist companies in reaching their strategic marketing objectives as efficiently and as effectively as possible.

Dave has been CEO of Exploring, Inc. for 22 years. He has a degree from Kennesaw State University.

LinkedIn

Mike Blake, Brady Ware & Company

Mike Blake, Host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series

Michael Blake is the host of the Decision Vision podcast series and a Director of Brady Ware & Company. Mike specializes in the valuation of intellectual property-driven firms, such as software firms, aerospace firms, and professional services firms, most frequently in the capacity as a transaction advisor, helping clients obtain great outcomes from complex transaction opportunities. He is also a specialist in the appraisal of intellectual properties as stand-alone assets, such as software, trade secrets, and patents.

Mike has been a full-time business appraiser for 13 years with public accounting firms, boutique business appraisal firms, and an owner of his own firm. Prior to that, he spent 8 years in venture capital and investment banking, including transactions in the U.S., Israel, Russia, Ukraine, and Belarus.

Brady Ware & Company

Brady Ware & Company is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm which helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality. Brady Ware services clients nationally from its offices in Alpharetta, GA; Columbus and Dayton, OH; and Richmond, IN. The firm is growth-minded, committed to the regions in which they operate, and most importantly, they make significant investments in their people and service offerings to meet the changing financial needs of those they are privileged to serve. The firm is dedicated to providing results that make a difference for its clients.

Decision Vision Podcast Series

Decision Vision is a podcast covering topics and issues facing small business owners and connecting them with solutions from leading experts. This series is presented by Brady Ware & Company. If you are a decision-maker for a small business, we’d love to hear from you. Contact us at decisionvision@bradyware.com and make sure to listen to every Thursday to the Decision Vision podcast.

Past episodes of Decision Vision can be found at decisionvisionpodcast.com. Decision Vision is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX®.

Connect with Brady Ware & Company:

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:02] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast series focusing on critical business decisions. Brought to you by Brady Ware & Company. Brady Ware is a regional full service accounting and advisory firm that helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality.

Mike Blake: [00:00:21] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast giving you, the listener, clear vision to make great decisions. In each episode, we discuss the process of decision making on a different topic from the business owners’ or executives’ perspective. We aren’t necessarily telling you what to do, but we can put you in a position to make an informed decision on your own and understand when you might need help along the way.

Mike Blake: [00:00:40] My name is Mike Blake, and I’m your host for today’s program. I’m a director at Brady Ware & Company, a full service accounting firm based in Dayton, Ohio, with offices in Dayton; Columbus, Ohio; Richmond, Indiana; and Alpharetta, Georgia. Brady Ware is sponsoring this podcast, which is being recorded in Atlanta per social distancing protocols. If you would like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. If you like this podcast, please subscribe on your favorite podcast aggregator, and please consider leaving a review of the podcast as well.

Mike Blake: [00:01:15] So, today’s topic is, Should I go back to in-person events? And as we record this show just prior to Memorial Day, we are in what I like to call the trans-pandemic period, where we’re not in the throes of the pandemic hell that we found ourselves in six months ago or in the process of becoming vaccinated. It’s an open question whether or not we’re going to hit the 70 percent vaccination rate that the presidential administration has told us is required to achieve herd immunity. And I’m no epidemiologist. I have no clue if we’re going to get that. But just sort of taking straw polls, I think, we’re probably in the fall just short of that. So be it.

Mike Blake: [00:01:56] But whether we’re vaccinated or not or we reach that vaccination level or not, the floodgates are clearly opening. We’ve had enough. Even introverts like me are stepping out more and are willing to take a little bit more risk than we were willing to take 6 to 12 months ago. And almost, like it or not, things are going back to normal. In fact, at this point, probably the biggest obstacle of things to returning to events – at least trying to sort of daily life, I’ll put it that way. Because events, I think, are a different story – but return to daily life, I think, is simply finding enough people that want to actually work the jobs that are necessary to make those things happen.

Mike Blake: [00:02:37] And, again, I’m not going to enter into that discussion. But we are going to have a podcast on a related topic soon, Should I change careers? Because I think a lot of people have been prompted by the pandemic experience to rethink what it is they want to do with their professional lives and their personal lives. And our relationship with work, I think, for many of us, has forever changed. But, again, that’s getting ahead of ourselves. We have a very good topic in front of us today.

Mike Blake: [00:03:08] You know, opportunities are now opening up left and right. I know that professional events, sporting events are going to, if not full attendance capacity, certainly close to it. I think in my original hometown of Boston, when the Bruins and Celtics continue to play, hopefully the Celtics will just end their season. Bruins are miserable. Well, when the Bruins and Celtics continue their play, they’re going to be in front of something like 85 percent capacity crowds. Fenway Park is going to something similar. I haven’t paid attention to what’s going on in Atlanta, but I think it’s following a similar path. So, we’re going back to this stuff. People are going back to restaurants. I’m seeing in my email box more announcements for in-person events.

Mike Blake: [00:03:57] It’s starting to happen, although I think timidly. And I think the question now begs the asking. Should we be going back to in-person live events? I don’t mean that from a perspective, should we as a society go back to that. That’s not what this podcast is for. And, frankly, I’m not qualified to answer that question and nobody’s asked it of me, so I’m not going to answer it. But I suspect that many individuals are weighing now, is it the right time to go back to these events? Is it the right time to sponsor these events again, host these events? Will people come? Are they going to look exactly like they looked, say, in October of 2019? Are they going to look different? Are we going to have more virtual events? When we talk about hybrid events, what on earth does a hybrid event mean? Is a hybrid event even feasible?

Mike Blake: [00:04:55] And so, you know, right now I frankly cannot think of a more timely topic that is on most business people’s minds. Again, whether we’re an event producer – and Brady Ware just had a a fairly large event, virtual, for nonprofits. And I understand it was very successful, but it was virtual. But, you know, other events now are going to be in-person. And what does that look like?

Mike Blake: [00:05:20] And I’ll kind of end the monologue here with this, is that, according to meetings outlook, the 2021 winter edition, 49 percent of event planners and 42 percent of event suppliers expect in-person event activity to return to pre-pandemic levels by 2022. So, whether your glass is half full or empty, that means that over half of people in that industry expect 2022 to still be down for pre-pandemic levels. And the report was silent on when or if the industry may indeed return to pre-pandemic levels. It may not even be necessarily a desirable thing to do that, at least on a micro basis.

Mike Blake: [00:06:03] So, coming on to talk about this is my friend, Dave Walens, who is President of Exploring, Inc. The parent company of several unique trailblazing Atlanta-based companies supporting the event trade show experiential entertainment and flooring industries. He is also the current president and grand poobah of an organization – which I’ve been involved for several years and is really one of the few organizations I have time for and make time for – CEO NetWeavers. And we’ve had a couple of guests on who have been part of that group as well. So, they account for a big part of the guest quota that we’ve had with this podcast over the last two years.

Mike Blake: [00:06:39] Dave has over 30 years of experience in developing and growing businesses. His ability to think creatively and strategically and his unwavering commitment to customer service are a true differentiator. He has extensive experience in exhibit design and construction, event fabrication, graphic production, flooring production, and project management. This experience, combined with in-depth industry knowledge and expertise enables Dave to assist companies in reaching their strategic marketing objectives as efficiently and as effectively as possible.

Mike Blake: [00:07:07] Exploring Inc. employs almost 180 people and operates in three locations, including a 150,000 thousand square foot fabrication facility, providing uniquely wide scope of capabilities and supported by highly experienced, versatile, and talented team of metal fabricators, sculptors, artists, carpenters, painters, and printers. The rapidly growing company was founded in 1999 and includes ID3 Group, Chisel 3D, Atlantis Waterjet, Brumark, Shelmarc Carpets, and CGI Graphics. Exploring has been named to the Inc. 500/5000 Inc. Magazine’s annual list of Fastest Growing Private Companies in America six times in 2009, 2010, 2011, 2014, 2016, and 2018. Dave Walens, welcome to the program.

Dave Walens: [00:07:51] Well, thank you, Michael, in probably the longest intro ever.

Mike Blake: [00:07:55] Well, I talk fast. I’m at least old enough to remember the FedEx fast talking guy. I remember him so I can learn how to talk like him. But, you know, maybe it’s a long introduction, but I think it’s a worthwhile introduction because I think it establishes your expertise in the space. And, you know, our listeners don’t have time to listen to amateurs. There are plenty of podcasts that already do that. We need to listen experts and you’re one of those. So, again, thank you for being generous with your time and coming on today.

Dave Walens: [00:08:23] You bet, Mike. And thanks for having me, man.

Mike Blake: [00:08:25] So, we talked about what your company does. I’m sure you’re going to kind of sprinkle that over the course of the discussion. So, I’m going to kind of cut right to the chase. I mean, 2020 must have been an absolute brutal year for you guys. And if I’m right or if I’m even half right, I’d love to know how you guys survived it.

Dave Walens: [00:08:48] Well, great question to start out with. As a great entrepreneur that I think I am, I actually got even better during the pandemic because I learned how to run a company with no sales. That’s pretty impressive.

Mike Blake: [00:09:01] Yeah. I didn’t know that could be done.

Dave Walens: [00:09:03] Neither did I. So, frankly, it was a very, very difficult year. 2020 shut down the convention industry. Obviously, the event industry. We were the first industry to close. And, frankly, we’re going to be the last industry probably to open as trade shows aren’t really officially opening even yet. But we have survived it and we survived it for several key reasons.

Dave Walens: [00:09:27] One is, really, the mental fortitude that you have to have as an entrepreneur and changing to meet current needs. And that really was the core of our whole company and our employees is, really, that mindset. And we’ve just had a great team that came together and did whatever it takes to find paths to get through this thing. And we’ve done some very, very creative and unique ways to get through it. And I couldn’t be more proud of my executive management team and my management team to make it happen.

Dave Walens: [00:09:53] And, fortunately, we were really busy and the industry was super busy in the first quarter of ’20. And because of that, it helped us get to some benchmarks throughout the year to where we had cash flow to help us get through some of the worst times until PPP kicked in. So, to be very specific, if it wasn’t for that, this industry, the trade show industry and event industry, may not have survived. Not like it’s going to be.

Mike Blake: [00:10:19] So, you know, now we’re here. As I said, we’re here at the end of May, trans-pandemic period. What are you hearing? What are you sensing? What are you seeing in terms of the public’s interest in going back to live events right now?

Dave Walens: [00:10:34] First of all, I would look for facts in the marketplace that indicate what’s the appetite for folks to go back to live events. And, fortunately, we’re right here in Atlanta where we’re watching Van Gogh open up last week. And, fortunately, our ID3 Group was the builder of Van Gogh, so we got to partake in this. Actually, they’re sold out until August already. They’ve sold over 200,000 tickets and hard to find them. And attendance has been outstanding. So, those are the facts that I look for. So, every event that I have seen or witnessed has seen tremendous participation. That’s an awesome sign.

Mike Blake: [00:11:17] Now, what about among the event planners and sponsors and hosts, are they equally chomping at the bit to kind of get back to this thing?

Dave Walens: [00:11:29] Yeah. I think they are. We’re seeing it because many of them switched to stay connected to their customers. The event producers, if you will, the ones who own the show, want to make sure that their customer base was able to see their customers so they went to virtual events. And doing these virtual events was great. But it was just one element. And there was a real missing component of that interaction. And I think that’s the outcome of the virtual events, it connected a lot of people but, frankly, lost that human touch, that interpersonal touch that we really crave. So, when the opportunity started to come back, I think these event producers were clamoring to get back face-to-face and they found ways to do it.

Mike Blake: [00:12:15] And I’m curious, I rattled off a statistic before we started the formal interview. But it seems like more people in your industry now think that this year and maybe next year are going to be transition years. And maybe 2023, if we go back to the normal or if we achieve the new normal, that’s going to be the timeline. Do you share that opinion or do you differ from that?

Dave Walens: [00:12:41] I think I differ just a little bit from that, Mike. What I’m seeing is choppiness through the summer. As trade shows start to open, they’re opening up very conservatively with expectations. I mean, you’ve got to remember, many of these shows have canceled. And what’s happening is they’re rescheduling for summer, that typically were in the winter or even the spring. As they move to different parts of the year, attendance is going to be lower. They’re going to be spottier. You’re not going to have the back to back shows. They’re going to be smaller. I’m sure all that’s going to take place. But they are opening and they are committing to go face-to-face.

Dave Walens: [00:13:14] What that means is, I think, we’re really going to see things come back fourth quarter. So, summer will be choppy. Third quarter will start to build up. But a good stake in the ground is CES, which is opening in January, which is typical of where it always is open. And that is the largest trade show in our country. And I think that’s the one that I’m looking at most closely to be an indicator of where things are to come. So, if we get back fourth quarter, then 2022 should be a very, very good year.

Mike Blake: [00:13:41] I did not know that CES was the largest trade show in the country. I mean, I knew it was big, but I had no idea that it was the largest. And I agree that probably will be a very good barometer, especially because with CES, that’s actually a trade show that has the kind of content that actually is more easy to deliver virtually than others. You don’t necessarily have to have people in a room to show a demo of a video game, for example. So, if people are coming back in droves, then I agree with you that that is going to be the leading indicator.

Dave Walens: [00:14:16] Yeah. And I think CES is going to be well-attended this year, I think people cancelled last year. So, think about all the technology changes that have happened over this past year. This is the debut of the show. And I think people haven’t been able to go to Las Vegas. There’s a lot of new things in Las Vegas, including the convention center. So, there’s a lot of compelling reasons why people are going to want to travel. I know the dangers and the health issues, but I think they’re going to be overcome by the protocols that are being done by these shows that are being very careful. And I think they’re going to really have a great attendance. And if that happens, I think it’s going to pave the way for a very good 2022.

Mike Blake: [00:14:54] So, when I start going back to live events – and I’m pretty sure that’s going to happen this year for me, even if I’m on the conservative side – am I going to see something different? How are those events are going to look different when I walk in as opposed to what I remember being involved in back in ’19?

Dave Walens: [00:15:13] You know, I think they’re going to be different. I think people are going to look at them a little bit more conservatively, strategically. And I also think you’re going to see a lot of hybrid and live combined. So, one thing we learned about the hybrid event is we’re able to touch more people. So, we could actually communicate to a lot of people at a company because they’re obviously not paying the travel expense. However, when you’re able to do these live events, I think it’s like a combination of those two things happening, where content will be available to you even after that show, long after that show for a majority of people.

Dave Walens: [00:15:45] Which means the way that we communicate on the show floor will absolutely change. And I think things don’t necessarily have to be as large and as complicated and perhaps as complex. And I think there’ll be more storytelling being done and brand building than there will be just showing up to say, “I’m coming to this trade show. I’m going to show my products.”

Mike Blake: [00:16:07] And I think that’s a good thing. You know, as somebody who does his fair share of public speaking in some format or another, the one thing that I’ve long regretted and have never found a good solution for was to solve the perishability problem. I take the time to put a presentation together. I think I do a pretty good job. And then, it’s just gone. It perishes instantly. And you haven’t seen me in some of these things. I mean, I’ve tried so many contraptions and setups and weird things to try to capture what I do, you know, with an iPad or an iPhone or something. And it’s been both cumbersome and just bad outcome.

Mike Blake: [00:16:52] I think that as a content provider, one, I will appreciate if there’s sort of a default setting where there’s going to be something to capture my content that can live on. And that, to me, also says that it’s an opportunity to scale the business model because you don’t have to just serve the people that are out there on site. Am I crazy or have I gotten a bunch of stuff wrong in that sense?

Dave Walens: [00:17:14] No. You got a lot of things right in that sense, Mike. I mean, that’s exactly what you’re going to do. And that’s why you’re going to look at these trade shows and events just differently, because you could touch your customer in different ways and it lives on. So, you think about now capturing all your presentations in your live presentations in a way that has a lifespan that is endless. So, yeah, you really can look at how you approach this much differently.

Dave Walens: [00:17:41] And, frankly, how you justify it. I mean, it’s an investment of your time and your money, and that’s the other part of it. The return on your investment is going to be even wider and probably more effective. So, you’re going to want to go to maybe more events than you ever thought about, or more trade shows, or do more public speaking because you’re able to monetize that even better.

Mike Blake: [00:18:00] So, let’s look at this from the corporate side. You know, I’m a partner in a CPA firm, which means, you know, we’re really good accounting dollars. The jury is still out. We’re really good at making them, but we’re certainly very good at counting them. And, you know, there’s an argument that I’m sure some people are making or some businesses are making. I’m not necessarily making it, but it’s being made, I’m sure. Look, we got what we needed to get out of 2020, mostly education for our people. It was a lot less expensive. They didn’t have to be out of the office. They didn’t have to pay for travel. They didn’t have the time disruption of travel. You know, what have we missed and we need to get back by being forced into an all virtual environment? What’s waiting for us on the other side?

Dave Walens: [00:18:56] And I think that all goes back to human interaction and really being able to get to know people and get to understand people at different level than doing it over Zoom. You can never really achieve that. In fact, I would suggest people are really moving more to fatigue on Zoom. And they are truly finding it as a good experience and a positive experience. So, I do think it’s just another tool. And what is missing is just that human interaction. It’s just needed. Flat out needed.

Dave Walens: [00:19:26] And I will go on the record right now telling you that, if you’re not traveling to see your customers today because, frankly, some customers won’t let you come see them. But the second your competitor goes and flies and meets a customer face-to-face and you don’t, you tell me how fast you’re going to jump on a plane to go meet with your customer face-to-face. It’s the cycle. It’s going to happen.

Mike Blake: [00:19:51] So. I think I know the answer to this question, but I don’t want to assume. So, are hybrid events, in your mind, are they going to be a transitional step or is that going to be kind of part of the new normal? The new outgrowth is that there’s a role for digital play in these things and they’re just going to ride shotgun with one another.

Dave Walens: [00:20:12] I’m glad you said the word digital this time than virtual. From our industry as designers and producers of experiences and trade shows, we’re really turning into content producers and storytellers. And as content developers, we have to understand that market now better than anything to help brands achieve their goals. So, this is just one element. And what we’ve learned through content development now has a lot of legs. I mean, we could create movies around the content we’re building or, you know, video podcasts, whatever we want to do. But we better be good at that as well as building physical structure. So, if we’re going to help the brand the best way, then we have to know all elements of this marketplace.

Mike Blake: [00:21:01] And it’s interesting, I hadn’t thought of that. But I think I completely agree with that, that the core competencies, I would imagine, and people of your industry – participants in your industry, I think are going to need to evolve. From what I have seen – again, I haven’t worked in your industry behind the scenes of your industry is that, there are people on the physical events and then there are the people that do the audio, video, take the footage and whatnot, but they’re almost sort of parallel.

Mike Blake: [00:21:38] From my observation, you only talk to each other when you need to make sure you’re not stepping each other’s extension cord, basically. Or not going to screw up their WiFi, basically. I imagine that in the operational model, that’s no longer the case. You either have to be able to closely collaborate with each other or maybe you even just own those capabilities all in-house.

Dave Walens: [00:21:55] Yeah. Absolutely. But I’ll take that maybe even a little step higher, Mike, and go back to the customer. So, the customer is the one that we really got to focus on. And when a customer has got complications between going through virtual or digital content and physical content, really, what it is, is helping the brand achieve what it’s doing. And it lives in the hands of the customer.

Dave Walens: [00:22:17] As we learn more about it, it goes back to the fact that as designers and builders of environments, we may not have known much about graphics in the early days. We had to learn. We didn’t print them ourselves at the time, now we do. But we needed to know about it as well as a printer did, whether it be LED, whether it be whatever content that we’re dealing with, we have to know it.

Dave Walens: [00:22:38] In this case, we’re really helping the brand achieve its goals. That’s really what’s happened. And that lives in the hands of the customer. So, knowing how to work and manage that content is the important part in executing it. Not every one of these exhibit companies are going to be experts in content management. But they’re going to have resources at their fingertips so a customer has to go to one place rather than two. And that is a big time saver for a customer.

Mike Blake: [00:23:01] I’m curious in terms of what it’s going to take to put events together. I infer from what you’re telling me, they’re going to be more complex because the customer is asking you to do more, whether directly or indirectly. Are events going to be more expensive to put on? Or maybe they might be less expensive initially because fewer people are going to attend them. I can see an argument. Maybe there’s no impact whatsoever. I’m curious, just in terms of the cost structure, are events going to be more expensive to put on and, therefore, by extension to attend?

Dave Walens: [00:23:34] I have a feeling they’re going to be more expensive, to be honest with you. I’m starting to watch some of the data out there. The way that you participate in the show, there are some rates that are proposed by – in our industry called – the general contractor. And those rates are paid for by the exhibitors. And we’re already seeing those costs escalate a little bit surprisingly. But I think they’re anticipating smaller spaces initially. So, they have to generate revenue so their costs are a bit higher. We’ll see what happens in the long run. But I think you’re going to see an escalation in that.

Dave Walens: [00:24:09] And, of course, then you’ve got ruggedized issues and you’ve got supply chain issues that are driving up costs. So, for us as builders, we work a lot in wood. You know what’s happened with wood prices over this past year. They’ve gone up over 300 percent. And just about all raw materials have gone up. So, I think you are going to see an increase in cost. However, I think it’s going to be offset by the return that you get. And that’s where I think this industry, frankly, from my side of the table, suppliers to an exhibitor, that we have an opportunity of resetting to doing all the things that we were doing wrong, to now do them right. And eliminate cost overruns and things that were in the way before that we can now find ways to justify it and bring our value. So, that’s the opportunity.

Mike Blake: [00:24:56] So, I’m glad you brought that up, because this gets into really, frankly, one of the questions I was most looking forward to asking you, which was, from the pandemic experience – and I’d love you to think about this as broadly as possible, because I think there could be a very broad answer that will bring some insightful things to the fore – what in your mind have you – or if you want to be broader, you guys in your industry – learned from the pandemic? And how are some of those things learned going to be evident in the events that you produce and we’re going to start to attend later this year and forward?

Dave Walens: [00:25:36] Well, one thing that I think our industry learned by being truly shut down is that overhead will destroy you. And our industry is based on large spaces to accommodate building large exhibits. So, we all have a very big footprint to do what we do. You heard I’ve got 150,000 square foot facility, one of them just to do the work that we do. Building overhead will be a change in the minds of these business owners from here on out. That they’re going to have to find alternative ways not to build overhead.

Dave Walens: [00:26:12] And I think that then changes the model for them to look to be more marketing based. Go back to the content marketing base, working with brands and a marketing solution. Then, actually making the actual physical components that they could strategically work with others to build them. And let them really work with the brands to make sure they’re done right. So, I think there will be a reset in this industry of getting smaller, leaner, smarter about the things that we do because we’ve experienced the worst.

Mike Blake: [00:26:42] And it sounds like – and please correct me if I’m putting words in your mouth – the way I distill what you just said is, in a way, getting back to basics. What is the core value of what you actually deliver? And maybe building an exhibit, although a nice thing that you can offer, maybe that isn’t necessarily core to the value. Is that fair to say? Or am I going too far?

Dave Walens: [00:27:04] No. I think that’s a bit fair to say. I mean, I think where we used to differentiate by how we built something, you know, I built it better than you built it. Today, it’s about the outcome of the piece that we build. How is that story being told in your lobby, in your event, at your trade show? The outcome of that is the most important part. There’s no concern if I made it out of one material or another anymore as long as it looks like what you wanted it to look like. But if the story is told right, that’s the power of that execution and there’s the value. And that’s what we need to focus on.

Mike Blake: [00:27:37] So, it’s not necessarily about how you build it, but really why you built it.

Dave Walens: [00:27:41] That’s right. That’s exactly right.

Mike Blake: [00:27:43] And I like that. I think that’s a lesson that actually can be taken beyond just your industry, right? Going back and taking a step back, why are we doing this? Why does the customer want it? And then, that can help you rethink, is this the right or the necessary path to get there?

Mike Blake: [00:28:02] So, you answered the question one way in terms of how you run your business, which is great, is instructive. But I’m also curious, are there any lessons that you learned in terms of actually executing the event itself? Anything that you or others you think have learned from the pandemic that are going to impact simply the way that you execute on what you already do?

Dave Walens: [00:28:26] So, my seat is a little bit different, so we’re a supplier to those designers and builders of environments. So, I work with design build firms, event marketing companies, architects. So, yes, every one of those folks are approaching this much differently. And even we are about how we look at building an environment. And, you know, cost is a big issue now. So, we’re having to figure out creative ways to meet a need and finding new techniques and new materials to actually achieve what the design intent is.

Dave Walens: [00:29:00] But I will say this, the entire economy is moving to an experiential economy. People want to have a story told. And they want to know the brand has a message to them when they go and do it. And that’s the biggest piece of all. And we’re finding and we’re seeing that happen across the country right now with some very unique things that are opening up. Van Gogh is one of them, and I doubt that. But Meow Wolf is another one you may be familiar with. They’re out in New Mexico, they just opened up in Las Vegas. It’s a grocery shopping tour of the experiential type. It’s really an art exhibition more so than anything else.

Dave Walens: [00:29:33] You’re seeing a lot of these shows that are coming to fruition and it’s all about just telling the story. Malls are changing, that’s a good example of that as well. What’s happening inside of malls? With Animal Planet as an exhibition opening inside a mall. All sorts of things that really are taking what traditionally would be just standard graphic on a wall and really telling a whole story.

Mike Blake: [00:29:59] Is there any concern in your industry that some segment of the population is just not going to come back to live events? And I’m sure there’s a number, I just don’t know how big that is. In your mind, is that something that’s of concern to you that some people are just never coming back because they’ve just been so impacted almost to a PTSD level of the pandemic? Or do you think that’s just not going to be enough to move the needle for your industry?

Dave Walens: [00:30:32] No. That’s a huge concern, to be honest, Mike. Not so much individuals themselves because I don’t think there’ll be enough to move the needle. But when you have Google and Facebook and Apple telling their employees not to go to a show or we don’t want you to go to a show, that is devastating. Or we don’t think we need to do it, not because of even health issues, but the pandemic has showed them we could figure out other paths since we couldn’t do the events and go to trade shows, we’ll find an alternative way to do it. That’s very concerning. And, also, it’s also the opportunity. Because they’ll never not touch their customer. They will be face-to-face with their customer at some point. It may not look like a trade show or an event like we’re used to, but they’ll find that out.

Mike Blake: [00:31:18] Yeah. I think that’s right. You know, with things like these disruptions, it’s rare that the thing that’s disrupted goes away. It often is forced to adopt a different model. Even right now, taxis have not gone away with Uber and Lyft, but they have changed what they do and they’ve changed their value proposition.

Mike Blake: [00:31:41] I’m going to put on my amateur lawyer’s hat now. What could possibly go wrong with that? But, you know, I do wonder kind of about liability. And I wonder if this conversation has come up with you or in your circles at all. And interestingly enough, as I was preparing for this podcast, I read an article yesterday that the WWE folks, the folks that put on the “totally real wrestling matches” are making their attendees sign a waiver form that if they get sick by being in an event that, you know, you can’t come back and sue them. Is that a concern? And is that something that folks in your industry are taking a look at?

Dave Walens: [00:32:23] Absolutely. Look, liability, in my opinion and that’s my own personal opinion, is the reason that it’s taken so long for live events to come back. And I have been fortunate enough in my industry, I early on jumped on to really trying to help my industry and partnered virtually with two of our biggest players in the industry, Czarnowski and George P. Johnson. And we started what is called Live for Life, where we pull together people in our industry to help solve the temporary hospital issue.

Dave Walens: [00:32:56] We’re all shut down. We didn’t have any work at hand and we turned all of our attention to helping our communities. And so, what better workforce than obviously our trade show world that was used to making these temporary environments. And all of that became the liability issue at every turning point. And because of that, also, we got a privilege to sit in the forefront as things developed and how we were going to get over that liability. So, the protocols that were put in place with GBAC, which is a certification in the cleaning of these environments. And every single convention center or most convention centers have been certified through this GBAC.

Dave Walens: [00:33:38] Or putting in infrared and thermometers at locations and how we were going to have apps that actually trace people through an environment, making sure they were safe to go in. A program called Clear To Go – which in fact, my nephew developed the software to that – so that you tested at home, you came to an environment, you check in, you check out. All these protocols are put in place to minimize liability. It will never eliminate liability. And I haven’t seen it yet eliminate liability. But that is the biggest concern.

Mike Blake: [00:34:12] Yeah. You know, liability is sort of a particular part of the American way of life, right? So, you know, it’s just going to be ever present. That’s just the way that our society is now constructed. And there’s nothing you or I really can do to stop that. All we can do is try to work around it.

Dave Walens: [00:34:34] None of us want to be sued, and that’s really what this comes down to.

Mike Blake: [00:34:38] That’s exactly right.

Dave Walens: [00:34:39] This is a business and you were playing attorney, so I know that’s where you were going with it. But for us, as a company, we can’t afford to have that happen. And that’s the problem. It’s not that someone’s going to get sick. That, I don’t think is the issue. People are going to get sick. But it’s not going to be put in and be sued because you were allowed to be on the show floor or an event or a live event. That’s the problem.

Mike Blake: [00:35:03] So, I want to bring up another part of the value proposition of live events I’d like to get your reaction to it. This doesn’t get talked about a lot, but I think it’s more important. I think it doesn’t get talked about a lot because it’s not as polished and corporate from an outside perspective. But the reality is that, being able to send certain people to events is a form of compensation. And it’s a form of professional recognition. And I’ll use the word boondoggle. You may not, that’s fine. I don’t expect you to.

Mike Blake: [00:35:46] But the simple fact of the matter is that, a traditional way that companies have shown their appreciation for certain employees to retain them, to give them sort of non-compensation compensation is, “Hey, there’s this trade show in Vegas. Why don’t you go for this weekend and take your wife and so forth and we’ll write it off. You come back with some business cards, that’s great.” You know, I do think that’s also something that needs to come back. And if companies are thinking they can chip out and stop and sort of try to put an end to or discontinue that practice, they’re going to find out the hard way. They’re going to lose some very key people, because that is a consideration. That is a way that you make employees feel appreciated.

Dave Walens: [00:36:29] Absolutely. And no doubt about it and good point. I mean, that’s strategic, I mean, it’s cheaper to bring your sales team together and put them to good work at a trade show than it is to have a separate sales meeting. So, doing it around a trade show makes a lot of sense and the perk of doing that. So, I agree with you.

Dave Walens: [00:36:48] But I’ve actually seen that firsthand, Mike, through not a trade show, but at our industry event which was in San Antonio in December of this year. And interestingly enough, I was really surprised to see how many people showed up in our industry, in a very small industry, who were shut down. I’ll remind you of that, we were not working. And we still had over 100 people to show up at that meeting. That was a testament to that exact statement. They came out because they felt they needed to and it was part of the perk, just part of their core makeup, and they just made it happen. And it was surprising.

Mike Blake: [00:37:24] Yeah. And, look, there’s nothing wrong with that, right? As long as at least in the business you understand the decision that you’re making. I think that’s fine if businesses want to do that. But it’s interesting that I don’t see it talked about a lot, as if people don’t know that that goes on, which is kind of interesting. But, again, I do think a company that thinks they can cut out this kind of commerce travel, just on that basis alone, is making a mistake because a competitor that is sending people to those events are going to look a lot more attractive in terms of being an employer.

Mike Blake: [00:38:05] So, my impression, based on what I read is that, while we are working our way through the pandemic and I think most of us feel more secure doing things we did not feel secure doing some time ago, we’re still concerned about flare ups. There seems to be a new strain of the month and whatnot. And we don’t know what the vaccination scenario is. And it seems pretty clear that, at least in the United States, we’re not going to have these vaccination passports. There’s no way a conservative Supreme Court is going to approve that. Either that or other than that, I just don’t know politics.

Mike Blake: [00:38:45] But, you know, flare ups can kind of happen. I think something that could kill a conference forever is to, all of a sudden, be another one of these infection vectors. We hear about the wedding in Maine, or the funeral in Georgia, or something, or the biotech conference in Boston. That was the big one that actually launched this whole thing in North America. You don’t want to be that conference. That is the infection vector. Because I don’t know that as a conference, you could ever recover from that. In your mind, how do you just protect against being complacent that, you know, we see the light at the end of the tunnel, but we’re not through the tunnel yet.

Dave Walens: [00:39:32] Well, instead of the word complacent, I would put the word confident rather. I really do. And I think everybody, just like you, will find when they feel comfortable and confident to start traveling and going to these events, whether they’re local or whether you’re going to have to jump on a plane and go. Let’s be honest, if we follow the science, it’s confusing. If we follow the politicians, it’s confusing. If we try even to follow the facts, it’s confusing. So, it’s our own facts and our own mind that we have to make up what’s justifiable.

Dave Walens: [00:40:09] I’m an entrepreneur. I take risks every day. Way bigger risks just working and driving and the things that I do that I just didn’t feel the risk that I would take in certain environments make it uncomfortable for me. I justified it. Does it make it right or wrong? No. It’s just what I was able to handle.

Mike Blake: [00:40:28] It’s right for you.

Dave Walens: [00:40:30] Right. And that’s what I tell people, “If you have the confidence.” You know, I read a report yesterday that said, if you had coronavirus, you have the antibodies. Although we’ve been told it may only last three months. Now, they’re coming out saying it’s actually better than the vaccine and it’s for your lifetime. You never have to have a vaccine and have to go through it again. Who’s to know until it happens again? Until we get sick again? But we can’t stop living. And that’s just where my line is drawn. And I feel like if I could build enough confidence where people will take it a little bit of a risk, then maybe it’s worth it. But it’s all about individual choice. And that’s the beauty of where we’re at. I let people see for themselves what feels comfortable for them.

Mike Blake: [00:41:17] We’re talking with Dave Walens, CEO of Exploring Inc. And the topic is, Should I go back to in-person events? A couple more questions I’d like to cover before we let you go and start planning and keep planning those events that you’re working on. But one question I’m curious about is the international angle. International travel is much slower to recover, for good or ill that’s just the way it is. Europe says they might open to U.S. traffic sometime this summer. But they haven’t committed to that. Frankly, I have not followed what the U.S. stands on. I haven’t heard any definitive word from the Biden Administration.

Mike Blake: [00:41:58] Is that putting a damper on events right now? Are there plans or maybe some live events that have traditionally been international in nature and may be duplicated and localized? What’s the strategy or response to that? Or even to your mind, is there a strategy or response to that?

Dave Walens: [00:42:13] No. There absolutely is a strategy around that. And, yes, it is having an impact on attendance and exhibitors. And, frankly, I think the owners of these shows are having to work around that and find what’s the best way to approach the show, which means they may go smaller. That’s where we go back to how are they going to survive? Well, maybe they take less square footage and commit to that, knowing that a percentage of their exhibitors and attendees are international.

Dave Walens: [00:42:41] And, no, they shouldn’t plan for it. I mean, you’re an accountant, it’s kind of that zero based projection. And we’re going to plan for zero. And if we get any, we’ll incrementally benefit from it. If they’re planning to have them come, they’re going to be sorely missed because they probably won’t be showing up. And so, we’ll see perhaps some or fourth, and that’s where I say fourth quarter by the time it really wraps in. And it’ll be a gradual increase so we’ll see it coming. But if you’re not planning for them not to show up, you’re making a mistake, in my opinion.

Mike Blake: [00:43:11] So, one thing I was thinking about – and I could be completely off base, so if I’m wrong, you’ll tell me – it seems to me that events are part of or at least adjacent to the hospitality industry. And their struggles in terms of just finding people to staff are well-known and well-documented. I’m curious if your industry is facing similar challenges. And if so, how are those challenges going to be felt at events and your ability to to put them on?

Dave Walens: [00:43:43] Probably the number one issue for our industry right now.

Mike Blake: [00:43:46] So, I guess strike. Good.

Dave Walens: [00:43:48] Thanks for the question. In all honesty, if you really think about this, our industry is primarily made up of entrepreneurs, business owners. And most of them are owner operators. And the only way they survive this pandemic is by getting back to the basics of a handful of people, perhaps just themselves or one other person. So, their workforce has been decimated. And our employees were furloughed and laid off. And as I said, our industry still is not open. We’re at 10 percent. Restaurants never hit this level. Our workforce is absolutely been crushed. Our skilled labor has gone. Our project managers, our sales teams, gone. There’s no one to sell to unless they moved in to new areas like virtual events. But for the most part, it’s all going to have to be built back, which is going to take a toll.

Dave Walens: [00:44:40] I think we’re all projecting issues to happen because of that. On the show floor, hard to get people and hard to get enough people to fill the demand that’s starting to happen. And we’re seeing that specifically on projects that we’ve actually closed up outside of the trade show world. But some traveling exhibits, some permanent installations, and hospitality projects that we’re working on. And it’s just going to be a challenge getting back a workforce, especially a skilled base, high talent, the carpenters and the welders. They’ve all found work in the housing industry, which has exploded, or construction overall.

Mike Blake: [00:45:18] So, Dave, this has been a great conversation. And, you know, as an aside for the listener’s benefit, this conversation sort of has an interesting side dynamic, in that, Dave and I serve on the board of CEO NetWeavers. He’s the executive – not the executive director. He’s the president and I’m the head of the Events and Speakers Committee. And so, we’re going to be having a conversation internally in our board in the next couple of weeks about moving to in-person events as well. As it happens sort of lays the groundwork. But I say that for the benefit of our listeners, because this is an actual conversation that’s going on in an organization that he and I are both stewards of at the moment. And it just goes to underline the real practicality of it.

Mike Blake: [00:46:05] You know, Dave, you’ve got a lot of information. We couldn’t cover everything in one hour. We never do. But if somebody wants to ask you about information, you know, about attending events, hosting them, sponsoring them, participating in some way, can they do that? If they want to ask you something we didn’t talk about, say, want to go in more depth. And if so, what’s the best way to do that?

Dave Walens: [00:46:26] Absolutely, Mike. Good or bad, I’m always available. I would suggest emailing me. And, Mike, I got to clarify one thing for you. You have called me Walens the entire conversation, and COVID has caused that, because it’s actually Walens. But every single one of them, from friends to family, have called me Walens. Don’t ask me why for 2020. But it is actually dwalens@exploring.com is my email address, that’s D-W-A-L-E-N-S@exploring.com. Instagram, it’s drwalens. And you’re welcome to follow me or any of our companies, exploring.com is our main website for the parent company. You can get to all our brands through that and you see other things that we’re producing. So, I’m very accessible and I welcome you to connect at any time. I’d be happy to share more.

Mike Blake: [00:47:19] All right. Well, there you have it. There’s Dave Walens, who has been the victim of the COVID long A. But I would like to thank Dave so much for joining us and sharing his expertise with us today.

Mike Blake: [00:47:29] We’ll be exploring a new topic each week, so please tune in so that when you’re faced with your next business decision, you have clear vision when making it. If you enjoy these podcasts, please consider leaving a review with your favorite podcast aggregator. It helps people find us so that we can help them. If you like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. Once again, this is Mike Blake. Our sponsor is Brady Ware & Company. And this has been the Decision Vision podcast.

 

Tagged With: Brady Ware, Brady Ware & Company, conventions, David Walens, exhibit design, Exploring, Mike Blake, trade shows

Decision Vision Episode 118: Should I Hire Someone with a Disability? – An Interview with Bill Schultz, Opportunity Partners

May 27, 2021 by John Ray

Opportunity Partners
Decision Vision
Decision Vision Episode 118: Should I Hire Someone with a Disability? - An Interview with Bill Schultz, Opportunity Partners
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Opportunity Partners

Decision Vision Episode 118:  Should I Hire Someone with a Disability? – An Interview with Bill Schultz, Opportunity Partners

In a conversation with host Mike Blake, Bill Schultz, CEO of Opportunity Partners, demystifies misconceptions businesses have about hiring people with disabilities. He explains why so many businesses, once they get past those misunderstandings and bring on someone with a disability, often expand such hiring. Decision Vision is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

Opportunity Partners

Established in 1953, Opportunity Partners is a Minnesota nonprofit organization that works alongside people with disabilities to provide job training, employment, and residential support for people to live more independently, succeed on the job and lead lives filled with purpose and meaning.Opportunity Partners

Opportunity Partners serves people with many different types of disabilities. Some examples include Autism Spectrum Disorder, Asperger syndrome, brain injury, Down syndrome, cerebral palsy, Fetal Alcohol Syndrome, and many others.

Company website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | YouTube

Bill Schultz, President & CEO, Opportunity Partners

Bill Schultz, CEO & President, Opportunity Partners

Bill Schultz was named President & CEO of Opportunity Partners in August 2020, after serving briefly as Interim President & CEO. Bill joined Opportunity Partners in 2015 as Executive Vice President, Business Development and Operations, overseeing all business services and production operations, identifying new products, processes, and services in community and center-based work.

Bill came to Opportunity Partners with more than 20 years of experience in a variety of business leadership positions and was drawn to the organization for its strong mission and history of making a difference in the community.

LinkedIn

Mike Blake, Brady Ware & Company

Mike Blake, Host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series

Michael Blake is the host of the Decision Vision podcast series and a Director of Brady Ware & Company. Mike specializes in the valuation of intellectual property-driven firms, such as software firms, aerospace firms, and professional services firms, most frequently in the capacity as a transaction advisor, helping clients obtain great outcomes from complex transaction opportunities. He is also a specialist in the appraisal of intellectual properties as stand-alone assets, such as software, trade secrets, and patents.

Mike has been a full-time business appraiser for 13 years with public accounting firms, boutique business appraisal firms, and an owner of his own firm. Prior to that, he spent 8 years in venture capital and investment banking, including transactions in the U.S., Israel, Russia, Ukraine, and Belarus.

Brady Ware & Company

Brady Ware & Company is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm which helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality. Brady Ware services clients nationally from its offices in Alpharetta, GA; Columbus and Dayton, OH; and Richmond, IN. The firm is growth-minded, committed to the regions in which they operate, and most importantly, they make significant investments in their people and service offerings to meet the changing financial needs of those they are privileged to serve. The firm is dedicated to providing results that make a difference for its clients.

Decision Vision Podcast Series

Decision Vision is a podcast covering topics and issues facing small business owners and connecting them with solutions from leading experts. This series is presented by Brady Ware & Company. If you are a decision-maker for a small business, we’d love to hear from you. Contact us at decisionvision@bradyware.com and make sure to listen to every Thursday to the Decision Vision podcast.

Past episodes of Decision Vision can be found at decisionvisionpodcast.com. Decision Vision is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX®.

Connect with Brady Ware & Company:

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:01] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast series focusing on critical business decisions. Brought to you by Brady Ware & Company. Brady Ware is a regional full service accounting and advisory firm that helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality.

Mike Blake: [00:00:21] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast giving you, the listener, clear vision to make great decisions. In each episode, we discuss the process of decision making on a different topic from the business owners’ or executives’ perspective. We aren’t necessarily telling you what to do, but we can put you in a position to make an informed decision on your own and understand when you might need help along the way.

Mike Blake: [00:00:39] My name is Mike Blake, and I’m your host for today’s program. I’m a director at Brady Ware & Company, a full service accounting firm based in Dayton, Ohio, with offices in Dayton; Columbus, Ohio; Richmond, Indiana; and Alpharetta, Georgia. Brady Ware is sponsoring this podcast, which is being recorded in Atlanta per social distancing protocols. If you like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself, and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. If you like this podcast, please subscribe on your favorite podcast aggregator, and please consider leaving a review of the podcast as well.

Mike Blake: [00:01:12] So, today’s topic is, Should I hire someone with a disability? And in a way, this is an extension of the previous week’s topic, Should I hire somebody with a criminal background or somebody with a prison record, I forget what the actual title was, but you get the drift. And the same sort of concepts applies that we find ourselves in an unusual, if not unprecedented scenario in the workforce where we’re finding ourselves in a shortage of workers. And although this is being felt most acutely in the hospitality sector, it is not limited to that.

Mike Blake: [00:02:03] Over the course of the last 18 or 17 months or so, I think our society is redefining our relationship with work. I think at a micro and macro level, many of us are readdressing priorities. And I think we’re asking ourselves the question, is it worth it? You know, is it worth the effort and the expense to have a two income family? And I think with people now that have had an opportunity, whether they wanted it or not, to work-from-home or withdraw from the workforce for a while in order to meet their family obligations.

Mike Blake: [00:02:50] You know, I think this goes beyond more than simply the more generous unemployment. I think people are simply asking themselves, you know, was it really worth the extra income to give up what I gave up in terms of being with my family, and building the home that I want, and doing other things in my life. I think the answer that some people are giving is no. And some people, I think, are going back to school and they’re retraining for a job they think will suit them better. And I think others will simply exit the workforce on more or less permanent basis, certainly not coming back full time.

Mike Blake: [00:03:26] And as our previous guest, Jeff Korzenik, indicated – I thought that was a very astute observation – the size of the American labor force had already been exhibiting decline since 2010, maybe a little bit earlier. And as so many things in life, coronavirus simply accelerated trends that were already underlying. And so, we’re now finding ourselves as an economy and a scenario in which labor just is not available and plentiful the way that we are used to being. I am 51 years old and I cannot remember a scenario under which it was just so difficult to hire. I’ve been through tight labor markets for sure. But this is a different animal.

Mike Blake: [00:04:14] And so, as a result, I think that decision paths that people would not have ordinarily considered, for example, hiring someone with a criminal record and, in the case of our topic today, should I hire somebody with a disability. I think, whereas employers would just simply not have considered that or not have given as heavy consideration to it. I think we’re now at a point in our economy where, if you want to run your business the way you like to run it, if you’d like to be as profitable as a way and you’d like to grow it, you simply cannot afford to decide right off the bat that you’re not going to consider large segments of the population. And that’s not ideology, that’s just simply arithmetic. When the music stops, there just are not enough chairs to go around. In this case, not enough workers to go around for employers. And, again, we’re just not used to seeing that.

Mike Blake: [00:05:15] So, this is an extension of that topic. Again, I hope you’ll agree it’s a relevant topic. And for those of you maybe who have wondered about hiring people with disabilities, maybe how you do it, whether it makes sense to do it, or maybe you agree with me and you decide, “You know what? I need to -” even if I wasn’t discriminating against the disabled, maybe I wasn’t being intentional about doing it. You know, here’s a stone that can be overturned that may yield some great opportunities. And the goal is to help you explore whether or not that’s the right path for you. And if it is, then what is the best way to pursue that?

Mike Blake: [00:05:50] So, joining us today is Bill Schultz, who is President and CEO of Opportunity Partners. Established in 1953, Opportunity Partners is a Minnesota nonprofit organization that works alongside people with disabilities to provide job training, employment, and residential support for people to live more independently, succeed on the job, and lead lives filled with purpose and meaning. Opportunity Partners service people with many different types of disabilities. Some examples include autism spectrum disorder, Asperger Syndrome, brain injury, Down’s syndrome, cerebral palsy, fetal alcohol syndrome, and many others.

Mike Blake: [00:06:28] Bill joined Opportunity Partners in 2015 as Executive Vice President, Business Development and Operations, overseeing all business services and production operations, identifying new products, processes, and services in community and center based work. Bill came to Opportunity Partners with more than 20 years experience on a variety of business leadership positions and was drawn to the organization for its strong mission and a history of making a difference to the community. Maybe we should have had you on our podcast that will be publishing soon on transitioning to nonprofit. And, Bill, I believe you became CEO last year, 2020. Bill Schultz, welcome to the program.

Bill Schultz: [00:07:04] Thanks, Mike. It’s great to be here. Thanks for having me.

Mike Blake: [00:07:07] So, Bill, let’s start off easy. I’m sure this is a question that you could answer in your sleep. You must face it all the time. And that question is, make the case that hiring somebody with a disability is a good business decision, not just simply a good social decision.

Bill Schultz: [00:07:26] Right. And I think you made a strong argument. One, just the necessity right now of looking into non-traditional pools that employers might look at. And this is a group that’s often overlooked. And people with disabilities want to work. It’s the vocation that’s in the DNA of our organization. It was started by a group of parents that wanted to have work for their children. So, they bought a house in the small town in Richfield, Minnesota. Why not work with local businesses and brought back work. And then, a few years later, they placed their first person in the community.

Bill Schultz: [00:08:02] Because people want to feel normal and often somebody with a disability is ostracized that way and thought of that they can’t. And we just need to understand they have a wide range of abilities and we need to understand what support they need. They’re not different than you or me. We all have skills and can really thrive if we’re supported in the right way. So, these folks are very loyal. They’re great workers. They care. They can be great teammates.

Bill Schultz: [00:08:33] One of the fun things, too, that we’ll hear is, it also boosts the morale of the other folks that work there. You know, sometimes there’s an individual, sometimes there’s more than one. And I think it’s a feel good thing. And people get to know them and it demystifies people with disabilities because some people will be uncomfortable around them. And once they get to know them as a person, that goes away. And they’ll learn what their interests are and they’ll laugh with them. And it just boosts things that I’ve heard that from employers, that this is an unexpected benefit that we’ve had.

Bill Schultz: [00:09:12] And there’s also some that, you know, you’re going to have other workers that might have a child with a disability, it also gives them some hope because, “Hey, look. There is a future for my child.” Because they may be worried about that and what does the future hold for them. So, those are some things.

Bill Schultz: [00:09:29] But, you know, for the business owner or the manager that is running that storefront, it’s, “I need somebody. I need somebody that’s going to be reliable”, that can get there, they can coach and can do that. There’s other things, too, that we place a lot of people because we’re having a lot of wage pressure. That, I don’t want to pay someone this higher rate to do something more routine or that employee might not want to do these routine things that someone with a disability might really thrive on.

Bill Schultz: [00:10:01] Some people with disabilities in it, we have such a wide variety of diagnoses and just a wide range of individuals and what their characteristics are. They might really thrive in that. So, where one employee might say, “This is really mundane and I don’t enjoy this.” Someone with a disability might find this very rewarding and be very good at it. So, they can parse out those jobs and focus those other individuals that they’re may be paying a higher wage on those higher skilled areas. And let someone with a disability do other things. Like, whether it’s picking up boxes and having them recycled, moving different things about. There’s such a wide range of duties that we do. And those are just some of the benefits, I think, of hiring someone.

Mike Blake: [00:10:45] Now, you brought up something I would not have thought of in a million years. But my observation certainly bears it out. At least Americans love a story where somebody overcomes a disability, to overcome something, right? There was something on the news recently about, I think, a golfer with Down syndrome that is having some success. And it seems like every other month is a great story in ESPN. You know, somebody that maybe was the 15th person on the basketball team had a mental disability and they put them in sort of at the end of the last game of the season or something. And everybody sort of goes berserk.

Mike Blake: [00:11:29] There is sort of that element in contrast with the prior show that we did – I guess really two shows, not last show – on, you know, should we dip into the pool of people with criminal records. You know, there are people that they did something to earn that or to receive that distinction. Whereas, as opposed to people that are handicapped or are disabled, chances are very good that they did nothing to do that. You know, they’re are born with, generally, bad luck, basically. And there’s a very different attitude towards that. And I can see how, under the right circumstances, under the right leadership, that somebody who is disabled on a team can actually become a rallying point.

Bill Schultz: [00:12:25] Absolutely. The other thing is, these folks are really genuine. They’re curious about you. There’s no pretense with individuals. They want to get to know you. And it’s another thing that people, once they get comfortable – and, again, some people are just uncomfortable because they’re unique. And our organization will do training for people and just talk through it. And that really allows people to relieve their anxiety and build that relationship with that person and help support them in their role. Because they’ll need support like anyone else. And one of the things that we’ve seen where people are really successful.

Bill Schultz: [00:13:04] So, we offer job coaching. And that’s one of the things that employers should know, too, that whatever state you’re in – we’re in Minnesota – most states are going to have organizations like Opportunity Partners with job development and they come with a job coach. So, this is a free support that comes with this individual that the business doesn’t have to pay for. And they can help with onboarding and they can help with training. We go out those first few days, we’re there the full shift with them, helping them get onboarded. We’ll create checklists for them. Talk with the manager about getting to know. Because everyone’s different and they’re going to have different behaviors and things like that. So, that’s just a real benefit for someone to onboard that individual and help them be successful. And, also, demystify even for other employees on how to interact with the individual.

Mike Blake: [00:13:54] You know, I’m curious about one thing, because your organizational profile says you work with people who are on the autism spectrum and have Asperger Syndrome. What, if anything, was the impact of Elon Musk’s Saturday Night Live monologue in which he disclosed that he indeed has Asperger’s Syndrome? Is that bringing conversations to you? Is it changing conversations? Too early to tell? What do you think about that?

Bill Schultz: [00:14:24] I thought it was great. And, you know, just the buzz around it that, again, it’s just making it more acceptable and letting people know. There’s so many people with disabilities and we have a wide range of abilities. And everybody you work with, there’s likely someone with something that’s challenging them. The folks we support, you know, are just more parent, more obvious, so it’s visible. And Elon just normalized it for people. And also say, “Look. Look what I can accomplish. And I’m on the spectrum.”

Bill Schultz: [00:15:00] And people with autism spectrum disorder, also Asperger’s, which is just typically higher functioning, are wildly successful. And technology firms are discovering this, and there’s lots of them that are reaching out to this pool. Because with some minor modifications like, you know, often a technology office will have a wide open workspace. This individual might have some sensory issues where they need even an office or high walled cube, but they’re fantastic at coding or they’re fantastic at software analysis. I mean, things that other individuals wouldn’t pick out.

Bill Schultz: [00:15:37] So, again, just a wide spectrum of people that come to us, we’ll place them in technology jobs or different things like that that are well suited for their skills and where their interests lie. But there’s also, you know, a lot of traditional programs like post-secondary education isn’t well suited for people on spectrum, so they fall through the cracks. And there’s just such a wide group of underemployed, talented individuals that we really need to figure out a way to support and get them trained. And then, educate employers on how to bring them onboard and help them be a valuable asset.

Mike Blake: [00:16:12] And I can actually attest to that. I have a relative who has been diagnosed of Asperger’s Syndrome and he, in fact, is a software engineer. And they do make accommodations for him. Not overly heavy in my mind, actually. But he is fantastically successful and they’re just never going to let him go. And the good news is that, people with Asperger’s syndrome don’t particularly like change either. So, it’s actually a scenario that works extremely well for them. So, I can tell you this from my own experience of somebody who has weaknesses related to disability elsewhere, interpersonal reactions, relations, that sort of thing. But in terms of his ability to produce code, I mean, he’s a parent. I’m not an engineer, but for all accounts, he’s not good. He’s great.

Bill Schultz: [00:17:08] Yeah. That’s not an uncommon story. Businesses have to be open to it. I think one of the big miss out there is, there’s a liability or there’s expensive accommodations that need to be made. And that’s just not the case. So, I think it’s just learning. You know, obviously, a business owner can just dip their toes in the water and go and talk with an organization and learn more and meet some of the individuals. And, really, I think, get comfortable with that.

Bill Schultz: [00:17:40] I think one of the biggest things is, we support people with the job coaches so we can help people, we can help train them, and be that gap. And maybe people are worried about disciplinary things. We can come in and have the meeting with the manager and the individual and work through challenges if that becomes a thing. Or, “I can’t fire this individual.” “Well, yes, you can.” That’s not a worry. And we can help with that, too. And other organizations will do the same thing. Typically, it’s a process like anybody else, right? You sit down and kind of talk over. “Well, you’re not doing this or we had this incident. We can’t do that.” And we work through improvement.

Bill Schultz: [00:18:18] And one thing that goes back to the point you made earlier, just the challenge. We’re actually finding employers be a lot more tolerant and give more tries on things because of the challenge. And they see that this individual is trying. And it’s just something that we need to work through and help them understand, because it’s often just something new that comes up that was kind of unexpected. And we help them sort through it. So, I think a big thing is just thinking that there isn’t a liability. And, you know, it’s not expensive to bring on one of these people. There’s not a lot of accommodations that you have to make that are going to be hard for the organization to support.

Mike Blake: [00:18:59] So, obviously it’s important to the individual, it’s important to society, and can be a benefit to a company to hire somebody with a disability and give them a job, make them productive, et cetera. Do governments offer any special incentives that you’re aware of to hire somebody who’s disabled? Are government’s helping offset training costs or hiring costs or wages or anything like that that you’re aware of?

Bill Schultz: [00:19:26] Yeah. Well, I know the state of Minnesota does. There’s a tax break for employers that do. So, I just recommend a business owner go out, I think it’s $9,600 a year in tax break, no matter the number that they hire. So, I would just recommend that they reach out to their Employment Economic Office of their state and look and see if they’re doing something similar. We even have counties within Minnesota, too, that will offer something on top of that. So, you can even check with the county in which your business is and see if they’ll offer some kind of grants. Sometimes it’s for onboarding and they’ll be like onboarding grants and then a retention grant that they’ll get a couple of cash payments for.

Mike Blake: [00:20:11] I’d like to ask a question that popped up. And this may be an unfair question, but I think you can handle it. And that is, I have an observation that coronavirus, in effect, made some employees effectively disabled. Not necessarily from a mental standpoint, although that may be the case, but I think they simply became impaired because of demands that were placed on them outside the workplace, simply did not allow them to be their best selves at work, as they ordinarily would have been.

Mike Blake: [00:20:44] And frankly, I am one of them. My work life balance has changed as I have become a homeschooling father and tried to help my wife realize her goals of starting her business. And that just means I cannot work 15 hours a day and accomplish those things. I really can’t work 12 on a regular basis, frankly.

Mike Blake: [00:21:04] And, you know, as I think about our organization and people that have had to kind of step back and others have covered for them, I kind of wonder if the coronavirus experience maybe has made us collectively a little more understanding of individual people’s limitations. Those limitations may happen because of an actual disability that they have or the limitations may be environmental, but the net impact is the same, I think.

Mike Blake: [00:21:36] I’m curious if you think that maybe coronavirus and just seeing lots of people have had their lives upended and, therefore, they’re not able to be their best professional selves. Do you think that’s led to greater empathy towards the disabled that have kind of had to live with having a different baseline, if you will, of performance than their peers?

Bill Schultz: [00:22:00] Yeah. I think it’s probably a mixed case and it kind of depends on the individual, not the disabled individual, but the other individual. Because what I’ve seen from coronavirus is, and to your point, it can make people more empathetic to others and the challenges that they’re facing and see that. But I’ve also seen fatigue with corona and a lot of people hitting the wall and saying, “I’ve already got so much capacity, I need to do a little self-care. And I need to dial back a little bit on how I’m supporting others.” So, I’ve seen a little bit of both of that.

Bill Schultz: [00:22:41] So, I think one thing that’s helped us a little bit is actually some of the social unrest that we’ve seen with some of the different – well, In Minnesota, specifically with George Floyd and Daunte Wright right. But it’s across the country, unfortunately. That we’ll see a lot more talk around diversity, equity, and inclusion. And some organizations will put people with disabilities in there. And we’re trying to get more people to think about that, because I think that’s really an important thing to help open people’s eyes more so.

Bill Schultz: [00:23:20] Then, COVID is creating, “Oh, my gosh. I’m not thinking about that.” And that’s something that we, as an organization, should really think about, is, how do we do this? Because when they’re trying to do a diversity, equity, and inclusion, it shouldn’t be to do check boxes because they see the value that these individuals bring in different life experiences. And they’re going to add value or they’re going to make the organization stronger.

Bill Schultz: [00:23:41] I equate it to the United States. I think one of the reasons we’re so strong is we’re not homogeneous. We’re a melting pot of people from all over with brilliant entrepreneurs from around the world. And it makes us a great country. And I think a diverse organization, you’re going to get the same benefit. And seeing that being pushed forward, I think, will help people open up to people with disabilities and think of them as that way, too. And, of course, people that have intellectual developmental disabilities or physical disabilities come in all colors as well.

Mike Blake: [00:24:20] Sure. So, you’ve been with this organization for six years, presumably, or five years and change, maybe, I’m not sure the exact months, but are you aware of any data that measures how well disabled or employees with disabilities have performed relative to their peers that do not have such disabilities? They tend to perform as well, a little worse, a little better, pretty much the same? In your experience, kind of what have the results been?

Bill Schultz: [00:24:55] Yeah. I don’t know if there’s analytics around it, but I can say that the best way to equate it is all around individuals. And I’d say, by and large, they’re generally the population. They have people that are great and people that have different struggles and just need to find the right fit. Sometimes they go into one specific job and, you know, you might try out that, “I want to be a lawyer, but, gosh, I’m a terrible lawyer. And, really, I want to go be a chef.” So, it’s the same kind of thing of finding the right fit for the individual, whether they have a disability or not is really where we see it.

Bill Schultz: [00:25:28] We do see more employers opening up, so we’re definitely seeing a huge impact or a huge growth with people being placed on the community. So, that’s certainly in the data. And we see more and more of it. There’s just more demand. And we really are working with individuals to find that. And now, obviously, with employers. Obviously with COVID, a lot of businesses shut down and some jobs were lost. But that’s reboundingly crazy, like it is around the country.

Bill Schultz: [00:26:06] Especially, so we place a lot of people in, like, fast food, or dishwashers, or housekeeping, cashier stocking. I think one thing you’ll see a trend of that’s higher in someone with intellectual developmental disability than maybe your typical person that might be in this position is longevity. So, that’s one attribute that I think you’re going to see more loyalty there. And you also see a lot of reliability.

Bill Schultz: [00:26:36] I think one thing that employers need to understand and to think about is, typically, the folks we place don’t work eight hours a day. There can be income limits based on their benefits. And that’s something that the employer can always work with a job coach and say, “How many hours can this person work?” Because there’s often a misunderstanding by the person that has a disability or their guardian and to which how much they can make. So, maybe they can work 32 hours a week, and they just need to work through that.

Bill Schultz: [00:27:07] The other thing is, a lot of our folks don’t necessarily drive. Some people do. It depends on where they are within that range of ability. So, they’re taking public transportation or sometimes the state has a transportation, and that system can have some tolerance to it that, you know, they might have to show up a little bit early or a little bit late.

Bill Schultz: [00:27:29] And just so the employer educate themselves as to what’s happening. So, an appearance doesn’t look like, “Oh, my gosh, this guy is late again.” And it could be that, you know, he’s setting up a ride with the local state agency and those drivers, they got to figure out the route or whatever it is. So, they can talk with that job coach and really help sort those things out. So, I think something just for people to be aware of is, typically they’re going to be part time. I would say on average it’s 20 hours a week. But that can be also really helpful.

Bill Schultz: [00:28:03] Because a lot of times, you know, if I’m at a fast food restaurant, my busy shifts are this window. And I only want you to work this hour and these hours. And I don’t need you otherwise. And most of the folks aren’t going to ask for benefits because they’re getting the benefits. So, that can be a benefit for some business owners.

Mike Blake: [00:28:26] So, is there anything that the disabled tend to bring to the table because of their experience, their life experience, that may distinguish them from more conventional job candidates. And you mentioned longevity as one. Are there other ways that, in some ways, maybe hiring somebody with a disability may result actually in a superior employee on average?

Bill Schultz: [00:28:57] Yeah. I think, again, we’re just talking about individuals. So, there’s a wide range of that. But, again, I think the one thing that you might see is, some of the tasks that someone you’ve hired off the street is really not very productive at it because they’re really bored with it. And so, they’re going to be slower. Where you can bring in someone with a disability that they gravitate to that responsibility and they’re going to be just incredible at it.

Bill Schultz: [00:29:26] We also do what’s called support employment teams, where we’re the employer of record. And a lot of other organizations will do this. We call them support employment teams. Lots of organizations call them enclaves. So, they come to a business. The organization will be paid by the business. And then, we pay those individuals. But we show up and do the work.

Bill Schultz: [00:29:48] And we work, for example, at one of the plants for General Mills here in the Twin Cities. And this is hard work. So, we’re repackaging and making mixes for baked goods, frozen baked goods. So, it’s a cold environment, fast paced, heavy boxes. And you go in there and they are replacing temps that they hire with us. Because the quality of temps, we outperform them and we’re more reliable. So, all of those things can be attributed to someone that they hire an individual. Because it’s well suited. The folks that are there work really hard. And I mean, Mike, if you went there, you would be exhausted. And were there six hours a day, five days a week. So, I think those things are just considerations for businesses.

Mike Blake: [00:30:39] So, you mentioned something that I’d like to dig a little deeper into, because I think it’s important. And you tell me if it’s not, obviously. But one sort of subtext of what you’re describing is that many employees with a disability have a a support system around them that deeply wants them to succeed in that job. I mean, that’s their purpose in life. You ain’t doing it for the money. You’re doing it because you think it’s important, I’m sure. And your colleagues think that it’s important.

Mike Blake: [00:31:18] And, you know, there are a lot of nondisabled employees that would benefit from the same thing. That would benefit from focus, and paying attention, and showing up to work on time, and basic rules, and also work etiquette. And, also, when things aren’t going well, how do you you sort of handle that? Who do you vent to, et cetera? And it just strikes me that the benefit of having just that kind of support structure must be a massive advantage.

Mike Blake: [00:31:55] Imagine if as a manager, you know, if I had an employee that I wanted to cultivate and keep on the right track, in a professional sense, I would love to go home with that employee and sort of be around them 24/7 or have my structure around them 24/7. I cannot. But somebody with a disability may very well have somebody like you in your organization that does that. And what an awesome benefit.

Bill Schultz: [00:32:23] Yeah. True. I mean, to your point, there’s two things. One, so we’ll place someone in an organization and the manager will see what we’re doing for that person. We bring along. We help them onboard. We’ll go in and check on them occasionally. We’ll check with the manager. How are things going? What do we need to work on? What do they need to work on? Help the manager understand the individual and how to best coach them. If something comes up, we’re there.

Bill Schultz: [00:32:50] And we’ve had managers say, “Hey, I’ve got this person that could maybe use your services or the services.” So, within the the state of Minnesota, that individual just needs to go to the unemployment office – what is it? – Extended Employment Office here and demonstrate the need, whether it’s a disability or just the need for support, and they can often qualify for a certain number of hours of service to help that. So, that does happen.

Bill Schultz: [00:33:22] And we, obviously, offer support for people that are living in their home. So, it’s not just employment, but they need help organizing their bills. Because we’re trying to keep people in their homes. That’s the most cost effective way for a government. You know, if someone’s not living in a house or an apartment program where they’re paying paying a higher rate for that. So, we do a lot of that support as well. Just whether it’s socialization, managing their medical appointments, medications, bills, all those different things. You know, we try to encompass the full life, if that’s needed for the individual. Just help them be successful. Just a little bit of coaching and support goes just such a long ways in making that individual successful.

Mike Blake: [00:34:02] As an aside, I just have to say, you said something about how important it is to keep people in a home. I’ve read numerous studies that the biggest inflection point to preventing sort of a disastrous social outcome is making sure people stay in a home. Because once somebody is homeless, it’s at least ten times harder to kind of reverse that and get them off that track. So, good for you on that.

Mike Blake: [00:34:30] So, I’m going to change tack on the question here, because I want to cover both sides of this issue here. And what I want to ask is, what defines or what characterizes an organization that maybe is not a good fit for somebody with a disability? And I’ll preface this. That may be a confusing question.

Mike Blake: [00:34:58] So, to make it a little bit clearer, you know, I’m sure that you don’t have 100 percent or 1,000 batting average. You don’t have 100 percent success with every candidate. And I’m sure that in every case where there has not been success, I’m sure it has not always been the candidate’s fault. There may be some organizations that simply don’t have the infrastructure, culture, understanding, whatever it is, to properly onboard, manage, and cultivate somebody with a disability.

Mike Blake: [00:35:29] So, that’s a long winded way of simply getting to the question of, you know, what’s a warning sign of an organization that might have some work to do on itself before it really would be a good place to find a professional or a working home for somebody with a disability?

Bill Schultz: [00:35:47] Sure. I kind of see that in two questions. So, I want to answer the first part. I think when you’re looking at an individual with a disability and what might not be a good fit, it’s like any position you’re going to hire for anyone. And does that individual have the right skillset to meet the needs of the job? Because you could hire somebody and it’s like, “I need you to be an engineer.” And if they don’t have a background in engineering, they’re going to fail.

Bill Schultz: [00:36:14] So, if you’re going to hire someone with a disability that maybe has a mobility issue, and you’re in a warehouse environment with forklifts flying around, and they might be crossing that traffic, that might not be a good fit for the individual. But there’s also going to be a job coach that’s going to say, “Yeah. Probably not a good fit for this individual.” So, I think that’s one thing, is just, it’s going to depend on that person.

Bill Schultz: [00:36:39] One of the things that we’ve seen where, I think, businesses are successful with, one, having an open mind and flexibility around the individuals. And we see this grow over time because businesses will try to, typically, be either jaded. They had a bad experience, and it didn’t work out, and they won’t give it a second try. It’s just like, if I had a bad employee, I’m not ever hiring another employee again. But that’s not going to work for your business.

Bill Schultz: [00:37:02] So, I would say, you know, open your mind and just work with that organization, the job coach, to understand what it needs to support that person. Because we’ll see that be successful. And then, that business will hire more because they can see the success in it.

Bill Schultz: [00:37:20] Another area, this is an example of a fast food, where we have someone working at a well-known fast food place and wildly successful. This individual has some specific behaviors that would be triggered. But the manager understood those. He knew how to de-escalate things. It never happened in front of customers, but they could handle it well. Well, this manager went on vacation. They had somebody come in somewhere else. This person had that trigger. It showed that behavior to that manager. And the manager said, “This is intolerable. You’re fired.” So, they fired somebody that worked there for years just because they didn’t understand.

Bill Schultz: [00:37:57] So, there wasn’t proper training on the hand over is one thing that we’ll see where you’ve got a good employee, they just act in a unique way in certain situations. And that person knew how to handle it and this person didn’t. And the way they reacted was to terminate the employee.

Mike Blake: [00:38:14] So, that’s interesting. So, it sounds to me that, in particular, if you are an organization that maybe doesn’t have a lot of experience or history with hiring people with disabilities, it may be a good idea to pave the way for that with some sort of training, I guess, right? Because you do have to manage differently. You may even need to alter your culture to some extent.

Bill Schultz: [00:38:42] Yeah. We’ll do training. Sometimes they’ll just want to have the direct manager do it. We also did a grant initiative to help understand where are some of the barriers. And one of the things we learned that’s really helpful – and maybe you’ve had this experience – so you go on to a new job and you’re trying to figure out things. Where’s the coffee maker? What’s the culture like? What if this happened? And your relationship is just with your manager, and you want to have that relationship.

Bill Schultz: [00:39:13] So, if you can bring on somebody with a disability and it goes with any employer and have like a mentor for them that’s not their manager, they have someone to go to, you know, they can ask any kind of question to and also just another support for the individual. That really help them be successful.

Bill Schultz: [00:39:29] One of the things we also did was, we had funding where we paid the wages. So, one of the biggest barriers is employers haven’t done it. And there’s a risk of, “Oh, I don’t want to do this.” So, we would say, “Okay. Here’s, basically, an internship and we’re going to pay the wages for this individual for three weeks. You try it.” It doesn’t work out, they just walk away. And we had, I think, 80 percent of the people were hired after those three weeks.

Bill Schultz: [00:39:57] So, it’s just getting over that initial concern. And, really, we need to demystify that, if you hire someone with disability, you can’t fire them because of discrimination. That’s just not the case. And, again, usually the organization is going to come with a job coach. I would certainly recommend that. I think it just is going to make the individual and the business successful. And they can help you remove that person if it’s just not going to be a right fit, and they can find something else.

Mike Blake: [00:40:24] What’s a favorite success story that your organization has had with an individual that it’s just been a great experience? Maybe you have a ton of them you can’t pick, but I hope you can pick one because I would like to give our audience an understanding kind of what the ceiling looks like.

Bill Schultz: [00:40:42] Well, holy cow, there’s such a wide range. We have somebody that’s a certified nurse assistant at the VA. I think that’s been a real success. We placed people, again, with autism and maybe they don’t need as much support, in technology jobs. And, you know, it’s funny because they’re making way more money than their job coach is making, which is fine.

Bill Schultz: [00:41:08] I think one of the success stories that I like is, we have a lot of people that come to us just for job development and will go out in the community. We have other people that come – we have locations – and they’ll come to us for work and they work for us or they come for enrichment. And we had somebody that came in to us, really severe autism, and basically wouldn’t even make eye contact with people, and just had his nose in a book. A big guy, he’s like 6’4″, a couple hundred pounds, not very verbal. And we just worked with him over the years. And he wanted to work. His dream was to work at Potbelly was really his goal.

Bill Schultz: [00:41:48] And we worked with him and just slowly developed these skills where he could interact with people and got him, you know, more and more skills. And then, we were able to to get him a job at Potbelly, where he worked cleaning the area where you eat. So, that’s just one of the great stories, I think, because it just shows anybody with the right support can be successful. It just depends on where they’re starting from. And that was just a great story to see because he came through so many challenges. And the perseverance of our team to get him there and fulfill his goal of working at Potbelly was really exciting.

Mike Blake: [00:42:25] We’re talking with Bill Schultz, who’s President and CEO of Opportunity Partners. And the topic is, Should I hire someone with a disability? So, another question I’m sure that our audience would like to get an understanding of is, what are some best practices in terms of working with an employee with a disability? We talked sort of in generalities in terms of being flexible. I’m sure patience is part of it. But I think those are features of a company. But in terms of best practices and for day-to-day management to maximize that person’s value and performance, do you have any best practices you can share?

Bill Schultz: [00:43:11] Sure. I think that the biggest thing is, they’re coming with a job coach. Be open with the job coach. There’ll be some different corporate policies that, either we wouldn’t be able to access their schedule or get access to them on site or talk with their manager, because I think that’s just so successful. We can say, “Here’s John, and John’s going to have these kind of behaviors or challenges. And this is how you might handle this situation. What are the things you want, John, to do? Let’s go over that.” They will develop that checklist for the individual and work with them on those things.

Bill Schultz: [00:43:45] Then, say, “Okay. If John’s going to have downtime, how does he handle downtime?” Because John might not know what to do if there’s not. So, he needs some kind of direction. So, they’ll work through those learning things. So, I think it’s really important to know that working with a job coach is just going to steepen your learning curve so much and make that individual and that business more successful in doing that.

Mike Blake: [00:44:11] Kudos to you, by the way, for using steeping the learning curve correctly. Most people don’t. That drives me crazy. So, well done. You get a Decision Vision gold star. So, you’re in Minnesota, do you work across the country or are you regional? And if so, are there other organizations in different parts of the country that can help with more localized potential opportunity matches?

Bill Schultz: [00:44:40] Yeah. As a matter of fact, we’re just in Minnesota, but there are all kinds of organizations just like ours across the country, great organizations. They can just search disability organization and they will find those. You know, Google will be their friend.

Mike Blake: [00:44:59] Now, we talked a little bit about, you know, what kind of environments may not be optimal for hiring somebody with a disability. And I’m curious, I think a lot of us, just because they’re visible, we tend to associate the disabled with food service, hospitality, retail to some extent. Is that by accident or are there certain industries that tend to be a better match than others?

Bill Schultz: [00:45:31] Well, those are pretty common. It’s across the board, though. You know, it’s retail. We have an I.T. tech specialist that works for the Minnesota Department of Health. We have people that work for the Transportation Department. We have people that work at Lane Bryant or a rehabilitation center, retirement communities. Boy, it’s all over the place. But restaurants, convenience stores, stocking, manufacturing is really pretty common, so all kinds of different manufacturers, industrial things, where there usually is some kind of support. And, again, doing those tasks that they don’t want to have those higher paid skilled workers doing so they can off board that work and really focus those people on doing those things.

Mike Blake: [00:46:30] Bill, we’re running out of time and I have questions I’d hope to ask, but we’re not going to get to. But if somebody listening has a question that they want to address or maybe go deeper than we are able to in a question we did cover, are you willing to talk to them? And if so, how can people contact you for more information about this topic?

Bill Schultz: [00:46:48] For sure. Just have them reference my name Bill and email at info@opportunities – that’s plural – .org.

Mike Blake: [00:46:57] Very good. Well, that’s going to wrap it up for today’s program. I’d like to thank Bill Schultz so much for joining us and sharing his expertise with us.

Mike Blake: [00:47:05] We’ll be exploring a new topic each week. So, please tune in so that when you’re faced with your next business decision, you have clear vision when making it. If you enjoy these podcasts, please consider leaving a review with your favorite podcast aggregator. It helps people find us that we can help them. If you like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. Once again, this is Mike Blake. Our sponsor is Brady Ware & Company. And this has been the Decision Vision podcast.

 

Tagged With: Asperger syndrome, Autism, Bill Schultz, Brady Ware, Brady Ware & Company, disabled adults, intellectual and developmental disability, Mike Blake, Opportunity Partners

Decision Vision Episode 117: Should I Work for a Non-Profit? – An Interview with Elisa Goodwin, Mission: Hope, and Stan Dawson, Retired from Crossroads Community Ministries

May 20, 2021 by John Ray

Crossroads Community Ministries
Decision Vision
Decision Vision Episode 117: Should I Work for a Non-Profit? - An Interview with Elisa Goodwin, Mission: Hope, and Stan Dawson, Retired from Crossroads Community Ministries
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Elisa Goodwin

Decision Vision Episode 117:  Should I Work for a Non-Profit? – An Interview with Elisa Goodwin, Mission: Hope, and Stan Dawson, Retired from Crossroads Community Ministries

If you’re a corporate executive or business owner thinking about a second stage in your career working at a non-profit, this episode is for you. Elisa Goodwin, current CEO of Mission: Hope, and Stan Dawson, retired Executive Director of Crossroads Community Ministries, discuss their experiences with host Mike Blake, the myths of working for a non-profit, and much more. Decision Vision is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

Elisa Goodwin, President/CEO, Mission: Hope

Elisa Goodwin, President & CEO, Mission: Hope

Elisa Goodwin is currently President/CEO of Mission: Hope, an Atlanta-based, international non-profit serving through local leaders in the world’s most remote villages to build sustainable solutions to their most urgent issues. She has spent the last 15 years in nonprofit service. Prior to that, she was a bank executive in small business banking and retail for more than two decades. For those considering for-profit vs. non-profit careers, she can definitely provide perspective. Elisa attended Towson State University and received a B.S. in Mass Communications. She also received an MBA from Clark University. Her office is in Alpharetta, Georgia on the Jackson Healthcare campus

LinkedIn

Mission: Hope

Mission: Hope is a Christ-centered organization committed to equipping churches and leaders to bring about sustainable transformation in isolated villages.

For over 20 years, they have tackled critical needs in some of the most remote areas on the planet. Led by the vision and adventurous spirit of Dr. Ben Mathes, their organization has provided medical care for millions and led thousands of people to experience new life in Jesus.

In 2017, Rivers of the World changed its name to Mission: Hope to reflect its broader reach beyond the river.

Their goal today is to continue building upon our rich history. While their work has expanded beyond the river, our heart and vision remain the same: doing whatever it takes to bring hope to the hopeless.

Their model looks at a village as a whole, working with the local leaders and churches to distinguish their assets as well as their greatest challenges. Their process heavily involves indigenous leadership for assessing the village and providing solutions to needs. Together they transform impoverished villages into sustainable ones.

Company website | Facebook | Instagram

Stan Dawson, Former Executive Director, Crossroads Community Ministries

Stan was the ED of Crossroads Community Ministries, Inc. from 1999 until 2016.

Prior to that, he was partner/co-owner of Northside Material Brokers, Inc. Prior to that he was Executive Director of Creative Interchange, Inc., (a division of FCS Urban Ministries) which focused on job development and business creation for those living in low-income communities. He also served as national Community Services Director for Prison Fellowship, Inc., Washington, DC. This organization’s mission was to assist federal and state prisoners transition back into mainstream society. He also worked with Boys Clubs of American where he designed the self-help youth employment program. He spent almost three years with Campus Life/Youth for Christ International working with low-income high school students.

After graduating from Georgia State University with a BBA degree, he began his professional career with the First National Bank of Atlanta in their Marketing Department.

Stan is married with two adult children and two grandchildren.

LinkedIn

Crossroads Community Ministries

Crossroads Community Ministries seeks to provide access to resources that empower people experiencing homelessness to progress on the road toward economic and personal stability

For over 20 years, Crossroads Community Ministries has been a leading provider of supportive services for those experiencing homelessness in our community. Last year, the staff and dedicated volunteers served over 4,200 men, women and children, primarily through our Renewal Project which consists of stabilization and job readiness training programs.

Company website | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

Mike Blake, Brady Ware & Company

Mike Blake, Host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series

Michael Blake is the host of the Decision Vision podcast series and a Director of Brady Ware & Company. Mike specializes in the valuation of intellectual property-driven firms, such as software firms, aerospace firms, and professional services firms, most frequently in the capacity as a transaction advisor, helping clients obtain great outcomes from complex transaction opportunities. He is also a specialist in the appraisal of intellectual properties as stand-alone assets, such as software, trade secrets, and patents.

Mike has been a full-time business appraiser for 13 years with public accounting firms, boutique business appraisal firms, and an owner of his own firm. Prior to that, he spent 8 years in venture capital and investment banking, including transactions in the U.S., Israel, Russia, Ukraine, and Belarus.

Brady Ware & Company

Brady Ware & Company is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm which helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality. Brady Ware services clients nationally from its offices in Alpharetta, GA; Columbus and Dayton, OH; and Richmond, IN. The firm is growth-minded, committed to the regions in which they operate, and most importantly, they make significant investments in their people and service offerings to meet the changing financial needs of those they are privileged to serve. The firm is dedicated to providing results that make a difference for its clients.

Decision Vision Podcast Series

Decision Vision is a podcast covering topics and issues facing small business owners and connecting them with solutions from leading experts. This series is presented by Brady Ware & Company. If you are a decision-maker for a small business, we’d love to hear from you. Contact us at decisionvision@bradyware.com and make sure to listen to every Thursday to the Decision Vision podcast.

Past episodes of Decision Vision can be found at decisionvisionpodcast.com. Decision Vision is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX®.

Connect with Brady Ware & Company:

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram</a

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:02] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast series focusing on critical business decisions. Brought to you by Brady Ware & Company. Brady Ware is a regional full service accounting and advisory firm that helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality.

Mike Blake: [00:00:21] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast giving you, the listener, clear vision to make great decisions. In each episode, we discuss the process of decision making on a different topic from the business owners’ or executives’ perspective. We aren’t necessarily telling you what to do, but we can put you in a position to make an informed decision on your own and understand when you might need help along the way.

Mike Blake: [00:00:41] My name is Mike Blake, and I’m your host for today’s program. I’m a director at Brady Ware & Company, a full service accounting firm based in Dayton, Ohio, with offices in Dayton; Columbus, Ohio; Richmond, Indiana; and Alpharetta, Georgia. Brady Ware is sponsoring this podcast, which is being recorded in Atlanta per social distancing protocols. If you would like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I am on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. If you like this podcast, please subscribe on your favorite podcast aggregator, and please consider leaving a review of the podcast as well.

Mike Blake: [00:01:16] So, today’s topic is, Should I get a job with a nonprofit? And according to a 2019 report by the Center for Civil Society Studies at Johns Hopkins University, nonprofits account for roughly one in ten jobs in the United States private workforce, with total employees worked numbering 12.3 people in 2016.

Mike Blake: [00:01:40] And I want to cover this topic because I think it’s timely for a number of reasons. Number one, as we record this on May 13, 2021, we are seeing some unprecedented conditions in the job market. For the first time in my lifetime – and I just passed age 51, so that makes me 1970 vintage – this is the first time I can ever remember people talking about a labor shortage. There have been times it’s been difficult to hire people. Of course, in the 1990’s, we have the dotcom boom and we had a very tight labor market. But there’s never really a thought that we just didn’t have enough people to fill jobs.

Mike Blake: [00:02:26] And the conversation this time, I think, is very different. I think it’s also relevant because, you know, the pandemic and other things that have happened, of course, right along with it, we’ve had massive social upheaval. And many of the effects of those two phenomena have been not great. People have been hurt. They’ve died. They’ve had their lives, their careers, perhaps, inexorably altered. But it’s also led, I think, as any crisis and cataclysm, really, creates is something new that’s going to rise from the ashes.

Mike Blake: [00:03:14] And what I’m observing as I read and as I talk to people, as I listen to other podcasts, TED talks, et cetera, one thing that’s rising from the ashes is, I think, many people are re-examining what they want to do with the rest of their lives. They’re re-examining, “Is what I was doing in 2019, is it really all that and a bag of chips, frankly? And do I kind of want to go back to that in 2021? Even if I get two shots, even if I get ten shots, even if everybody I know and their uncle and aunt get shots, you know, am I all fired up to going back to what I was doing then?”

Mike Blake: [00:03:53] And, now, realizing how life short is – I don’t know what the death toll is in the United States. The official death toll is a-half-a-million. I think it’s likely higher than that from the pandemic. And although it’s been concentrated among the elderly, it certainly has not been limited to that. And so, you know, my Generation X and other subsequent generations have been confronted with mortality in, in your face, widespread way, that, again, I don’t think that I can remember. I think it’s prompting a lot of people to do some soul searching and say, “Am I doing what I really want to be doing?”

Mike Blake: [00:03:53] And that leads into that labor force discussions, partially that we don’t have enough people. On our last conversation we had last week with Jeffrey Korzenik, you know, the decline in labor force in the United States has been occurring since 2010. This phenomenon just simply made it more noticeable. But I think a lot of people are reexamining, not only what are they doing, but why are they doing it? And I think people are starting to place a premium on, “If I’m going to work, then I want it to be more meaningful than a paycheck. Frankly, I want it to be more meaningful than paying off my student loans. If that’s all it is, I’m not sure how I’m interested.”

Mike Blake: [00:05:19] And so, I think for many people the thoughts are turning to a nonprofit. I think by definition, when you work for a nonprofit, you’re committing to work for something that’s a purpose greater than yourself. And our guests will talk to us more about that. But one of the attractions, I think, for working for a nonprofit is – I cannot imagine it’s all about the paycheck. You don’t change your career to the nonprofit world to get rich. You change your career because you want your work life to have a greater impact beyond yourself. And from what I’m seeing and how people are reflecting upon their lives, how their spirituality is evolving in this trans-pandemic environment, I think that it’s a timely topic. And I hope that you, the listeners, think that it’s a timely topic, too.

Mike Blake: [00:06:10] And helping us work through this are two guests, Elisa Goodwin and Stan Dawson. Elisa Goodwin is currently President and CEO of Mission: Hope, an Atlanta based international nonprofit serving through local leaders in the world’s most remote villages to build sustainable solutions to their most urgent issues. Last year, Mission: Hope served 45,000 in remote villages where no one else was helping. She spent the last 15 years in nonprofit service. Prior to that, she was a bank executive in small business banking and retail for more than two decades. For those considering profit versus nonprofit careers, she can definitely provide perspective.

Mike Blake: [00:06:47] Also joining us is Stan Dawson, who is the Executive Director of Crossroads Community Ministries from 1999 to 2016 – at which point, I believe he retired. Prior to that, Stan was a partner and co-owner of Northside Material Brokers Incorporated. And before that, was executive director of Creative Interchange Incorporated, which is a division of FCS Urban Ministries that’s focused on job development and business creation for those living in low income communities. He also served as National Community Services Director for Prison Fellowship Incorporated in Washington, D.C. Another connection, because our last topic was about making the decision to hire people with a criminal record.

Mike Blake: [00:07:24] Stan also worked with Boys Clubs of America, where he designed the Self-help Youth Employment Program. He spent almost three years in the Campus Life Youth for Christ International, working with low income high school students. Stan’s first job out of school was with the First National Bank of Atlanta in their marketing department. Currently, he’s married with two adult children and two grandchildren. Elisa and Stan, welcome to the program.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:07:47] Thank you, Mike.

Stan Dawson: [00:07:47] Thank you. Glad to be with you.

Mike Blake: [00:07:49] So, this may sound like an obvious question, but I think it’s actually quite a new one, so I’m going to ask it anyway because I don’t want to assume. What is a nonprofit exactly?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:08:03] Do you want to go first, Mike? Or me?

Mike Blake: [00:08:08] Elisa, why don’t you take it.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:08:09] Sure. So, it’s an organization that qualifies for tax exempt status from the IRS. And its mission or purpose is to further a social cause and provide public benefit. And if you are qualifying for people to write off their donations, then you’re a 501(c)3. That’s the really simple explanation or definition of it, but that’s pretty much what it is.

Mike Blake: [00:08:43] Okay. So, I like you both to talk about your origin stories. Stan, I’ll ask you to lead off first. You spent a good chunk of your career, and it sounds like from a pretty early age, in the nonprofit sector. How did you get there?

Stan Dawson: [00:08:59] That was not my intent. I grew up right near downtown Atlanta. I got a business degree. And my one goal in life at that point was to make as much money as I could coming out of college with a business degree. I got on at that point, as you had mentioned earlier, with one of the largest banks in Atlanta. Then, it was known as the First National Bank of Atlanta, since morphed many times into Wells Fargo today.

Stan Dawson: [00:09:36] And I was really fortunate through a professor friend, landed in their marketing department. And most people starting out in banking, at least back then, you had to start at ground level. So, I was really fortunate, excited, thrilled that I’d be on the path to establishing a solid financial foundation.

Stan Dawson: [00:10:02] Well, 15 months into it, my heart started pounding away and I realized that for me to have a goal of making as much money as I could wasn’t going to bring me joy in life. It might bring me a happy retirement, but I wanted to enjoy what I was doing while I was doing it. So, I got involved with, as you said, Campus Life Youth Organization. Mainly underprivileged teenagers at that point fell so in love with that.

Stan Dawson: [00:10:37] I morphed into the next phase, which was aligning myself with a brand new organization, since become quite well-known, at least in southeast Atlanta, and that’s Family Consultation Services, which in effect worked with the same population. But parents, children, teens, whomever was in that demographic. I fell in love even deeper with what I was doing that led to involvement at one point with federal prisoners. Chuck Colson, who you may remember is President Richard Nixon’s hatchet man, started this organization. Tremendous job. We were helping federal prisoners. I did that for a few years. Moved back to Atlanta, re-engaged with FCS, ran some businesses for them.

Stan Dawson: [00:11:41] And then, after 20 plus years, I decided maybe it was time to step away, take a break from nonprofit work, and get back to pursuing the goal of chasing money. So, I went into partnership with another individual. I was making more money than I ever had. And suddenly, the heart started pounding away. And I said, “This isn’t worth it. I’m making all this money and I’m very miserable.” With that – long story short – a door opened up the Crossroads. They were looking for an executive director. Because of my background and, obviously, my most recent business experience, I jumped into the hopper and was selected to be the next executive director. And then, until I retired, I just spent 16 incredible joyous years doing that program, directing that program.

Mike Blake: [00:12:47] Elisa, how about you? I know you had a little bit of a different path. What’s your origin story? How did you and the nonprofit world meet?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:12:55] Okay. Well, so I was having a really great time in banking for, like you said, over two decades. I moved up the ladder quickly, got my MBA to be more competitive. One trip still why. I just got stock options. It was a blast. And I loved banking, so the only mission that I had was to be the next bank president. I was perfectly satisfied. Well, and I’m being facetious, but the mistake of saying, “God, send me where you want me. And if you ever want me to leave banking, just make it clear and I’ll leave.” Well, there you go.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:13:35] And then, two weeks later, we were getting ready for a recession. And the senior team was getting together and the leader said, “You guys need to decide that you’re in this with me and we’re going to make some changes. It’s going to affect you, but you’ll still get your salary and all your good stuff. But are you in?” And long story short, I felt like I could make a decision right there. So, since I needed to make a decision, I really felt like that was a clear point to terminate a 17 year relationship with one particular leader.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:14:09] It was super difficult to do, and I was sure that my purpose was to go in the financial industry, just a different job. I was a senior VP at that point, like you said, in retail and small business banking, and loving every minute of it and very fulfilled. So, I started looking in the financial industry and applied to one nonprofit that I knew of because of my experience with a board member who gave generously to that organization. And I read their book and loved it.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:14:40] And, actually, the president of that organization was the former prison fellowship president after Chuck Colson – so we have a little connection there – Tom Pratt. So, anyway, they called me and I was sure that they were going to offer me or invite me to give a major gift. I really didn’t think they would want, you know, a jaded banker to take a ministry position. And so, I went in and they didn’t have a role. And the guy liked me and said, “All I have is this assistant position.” And here I have been a senior V.P. and I said, “Well, you know, if this is where I’m supposed to be, God will provide, let’s keep talking.”

Elisa Goodwin: [00:15:18] I ended up going into the senior team meeting. He wanted me to meet everyone. Tom Pratt saw me and said, “I want to see this lady’s resume.” And as a result, my first gig was at an international ministry and I was running, essentially, sales. The equivalent in a nonprofit of sales is philanthropy fundraising. So, I ran the fundraising, the marketing and communications. And that was my background. And that’s how it all started.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:15:48] And I’ve got to tell you, I’ve never felt like I had to be in nonprofit, even though it’s certainly rewarding. But every time I think that God is kind of stirring me up to go somewhere and I say, “Well, if you want me to go back into the for-profit world and, you know, be a light and an encouragement and do my job, I’ll do it.” But he keeps sending me into nonprofit. So, here I am, 15 years later, still in nonprofit, and enjoying it. I’ve had a career that I’ve loved every minute of for-profit and nonprofit.

Mike Blake: [00:16:18] Well, I can see that. For the listeners, you can’t see the video, but I can see she’s got a big smile on her face when she talks about this. So, it certainly looks like you’re enjoying it. So, a question I’d like each of you to take a swing at. It could be just my bias, though I don’t think so. But if it is, I’ll cop to it. But I think there’s a sense that when people leave the corporate sector to join a nonprofit and to join that world, there can be the perception that that’s sort of a transition to retirement or maybe a capstone to a career.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:16:59] It’s viewed – I think in some circles, if you don’t know what you’re talking about to be perfectly candid – as something of a step down from being in the corporate environment. It doesn’t pay as well. Perhaps the intensity is less, but you’ll either confirm or disabuse me of that notion. And I’m curious, is that accurate? Is that a bad bias? Is there some truth to that? How would you kind of react to that observation?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:17:28] I can go first if you want. I would say, first of all, I know that some people consider it like their half-time transition. And some people do consider it kind of in semiretirement mode. But I think it’s just completely situational and can go either way. For me, it was just the next step in my career. Did it actually set me back? Yeah. I took about a 65 percent pay cut and went from six weeks vacation to zero the first year with loads of experience. So, heck yeah, I call it my desert period.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:18:06] Now, you know, I’ve pretty much recovered from that. I mean in terms of that, there are jobs that are sweet that pay a lot in nonprofit, but there’s a lot more probably that don’t, I would say. And I even worked for an organization that didn’t have medical benefits and I had to turn around and find ways to provide that because I could not take care of my people.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:18:30] But in terms of how demanding it is, I would say that I thought I worked like a dog in banking, but now I work like a dog, a cat, and a gorilla. I mean, it’s a lot. It’s demanding and rewarding. So, if you don’t do it for the passion and the mission, then you probably should still be in for-profit because, you know, it is rare that you are compensated fully for all that you sacrifice to be in that role. And I mean that in a positive way. But it is the truth.

Mike Blake: [00:19:04] I mean, there’s a trade off that we’re talking about, at least I perceive it to be that way anyway. Stan, do you want to add anything to that?

Stan Dawson: [00:19:12] Well, just to say that, for me, as I mentioned, I was making more money than I ever had, but my heart was just empty. And when this opportunity presented itself, I couldn’t get to it fast enough. I had to dissolve my side of the partnership. But it was just such a joy to leave. The fact that I was going to take a pay cut never entered my mind. I knew that I was getting older faster and that I wanted the rest of my work life to be involved with helping to make lives better for the organization we’re serving.

Stan Dawson: [00:20:00] I will say that the business opportunity, when you run a business, of course, PNLs, balance sheets are very, very important. Often people think that in the nonprofit sector, it’s not quite as important. But it’s just like running a business. You better have more revenue coming in than going out. Or regardless of how big your heart is, the doors are going to eventually close. So, my business degree and ownership position for those four or five years, I took all that skill with me to the nonprofit. And I think elevated my management standards, if you will, much quicker than it would have had I just started out in the world of nonprofits.

Mike Blake: [00:20:57] You know, you say something that I like to pause on a little bit, because I think that’s important. I’ve served on boards of a couple of nonprofits. I’ve never been employed by one. I’ve never been offered employment by one. But one thing that struck me is that, generating revenue for a nonprofit, I think, may be harder – maybe a lot harder than generating revenue for a for-profit.

Mike Blake: [00:21:24] You know, I’m a partner in a CPA firm and I’m a practice leader, and, frankly, I can sell. And if I don’t, I’m going hungry. But if I had to sell kind of the way that nonprofits generate revenue, that’s just a different animal, man. And I think in a lot of ways it’s harder, isn’t it? I mean, what do you think about that? I am on to something there or am I all wet?

Stan Dawson: [00:21:53] No. Not at all. At Crossroads, who we had the privilege of serving was people who came to us that were homeless. They could have been a bank executive or pro athlete, crack, cocaine, abuser, prostitute, all walks of life came through our doors at Crossroads. And, you know, when you don’t have a hard product to sell, if you will, for $0.97, what you’re selling is trying to make a human’s life a little bit more joyful, more livable, more sustainable, that’s a challenging task. I’m sure Elisa with her mission runs into the same thing.

Stan Dawson: [00:22:56] But to try to raise revenue for that particular population is a real challenge. So, you better come with a briefcase full of business savvy knowledge base about the population you’re serving, and what it is you need and are asking for, so that the folks you’re requesting funds from will buy into your sense of accountability. Because if they don’t, there’s no going back with a less expensive product.

Mike Blake: [00:23:34] Elisa, what do you think?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:23:35] Oh, my word, it’s tremendously different and more difficult. So, in banking, of course, if you can show me how you can save me money and make my business easier to run, and I like and trust you, you’re goals. In the nonprofit sector, you have to still build the relationship and be trustworthy. But then, as Stan said, you’ve got to connect with where their heart is, where they want to have their money make the biggest impact. And there are tons of different ways they look at that, right? So, you’ve got to figure out what triggers them and what’s going to keep them engaged, as opposed to simply save you money on your loan and your deposits, et cetera. I’ve got your business as long as I stay competitive.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:24:24] And just like the for-profit industry, you are competing with tons of other nonprofits who know where the money is and they are pinging on these people as well. And then, you’ve got the people that are so jaded, they talk about how they feel like an ATM machine. That’s kind of a common phrase. And then, they’ll use third parties like National Christian Foundation and other community foundations so that they are a bit separated from the organizations unless they choose to engage. And then, that kind of creates a wider distance for you and that the partner so it’s even harder to keep them engaged.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:25:05] I mean, there are benefits to it. So, not discounting the value, but it is kind of, now, there’s an additional gatekeeper to that person. So, it, honestly, is a lot tougher. You can transition those skills and learn the ways to engage people and be really conscious of what triggers them and their vision trips and things like that. But it’s not as simple. I could do banking, and my team and I would be number one all day long for years. But transitioning to nonprofit, it was just a whole new game.

Mike Blake: [00:25:38] So, I want to come back to that transition, because I think that’s really important for our listeners to understand kind of what they’re getting into. And on that note, you know, when you went from corporate into nonprofit, what was that adjustment like? How long did it take for you to get adjusted? What were the hardest things for you to catch up to in order to, you know, for lack of a better term, find your stride? Elisa, yeah.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:26:11] For me, a couple of things, one – and this one’s really minor, but it’s an adjustment – how you communicate. So, when you’re in ministry, oftentimes you’ll do your closing with blessings or, you know, whatever, depending on what your mission is and what resonates for you. But I was used to sincerely in regards, right? So, suddenly I’m getting all of the kind of Christianize verbiage, you know, both in communications to partners and even in my own emails. So, that was a significant change.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:26:45] It was intimidating to be around people who had led these, at least for all intents and purposes, amazing Christian life, a lot of pastors or this and that so they had dedicated themselves. And I’m coming in, you know, divorced and just, you know, the mess that you bring with normal life and feeling like each one of them came out of the womb with a Bible in hand. So, it was a bit intimidating. And then, the adjustment of realizing that you can’t go in for a sale like you do in for-profit.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:27:19] And even hiring people, there were people that I could see that had great sales skills, but were they willing to soften them? You know, in the case of working in a Christian organization, you want to also make sure you’re praying and allowing the Holy Spirit to lead. So, all of those things to make sure those rough edges didn’t turn people away. So, there were a lot of nuances that had to be done for me and as I looked at other people to bring into the organization. But still, I would say once I got settled in after, say, a quarter, three months, I felt pretty comfortable. And the skills that I had acquired through education and experience actually really made it fairly easy to transition as long as you’re self-aware and make the adjustments.

Mike Blake: [00:28:06] So, Stan and Elisa said something that I’d like to ping you on, because I find that to be true, too. You know, nonprofits in a way can have their own language to them, can’t they? The accounting can be different. The terminology can be different. And that can be difficult to catch up to.

Stan Dawson: [00:28:28] Yes, without question. You know, for me, I think the greatest asset – that I don’t take any credit for this. It was just there in my heart – people would say to me, thinking about the transition you’re describing, “What’s it take, Stan?” The first and foremost thing that enabled me – and by the way, my first day of work, I discovered there was a $60,000 debt hanging over the organization that no one bothered to share with me when we were in the recruitment phase of the process.

Stan Dawson: [00:29:11] But I did know one thing, like Elisa, I knew that God had opened this door for me and that my passion was overwhelming. I didn’t realized it at the time, but that ended up being my greatest tool in my briefcase, because, you know, with some people, you can use the right language. You can come up with the correct bylines. But, really, what closes the deal is if the presenter has an incredible passion for what it is they’re doing. And I had that passion. Again, I don’t give myself any credit. It was just there already.

Stan Dawson: [00:29:57] But as soon as they read my passion, I had instant access to whoever it was I was presenting to. And then, once they realized that we were running Crossroads, just like they were running Chick-fil-A or whatever other organization they were corporately involved with, you know, the door got even wider for us. There’s a tremendous sense out there – and I think it’s true throughout America – of wanting to make life better for those who need a little bit of assistance. But often time, as Elisa alluded to, the puzzle gets real jumbled and you’re not sure where or how to do that. But when you come with passion, one, and, two, business savvy about the organization you’re managing, credibility becomes much easier.

Mike Blake: [00:31:07] So, Stan, I like to follow up on that. You said that when you joined, there is a $50,000 debt that wasn’t overly enthusiastically disclosed to you. Did your business background help you address that debt in a way that, maybe, would not have been as effective had you not had that background?

Stan Dawson: [00:31:36] Without question. And I wish it had been 50, but it was 60.

Mike Blake: [00:31:40] Sixty. Okay. What’s $10,000 among friends?

Stan Dawson: [00:31:45] Yeah. Not only my nonprofit experience, but the business experience running my own business there for a while, taught me how important it was to cross T’s and dot I’s. And, again, because we dealt with so much of the private sector corporate community in metro Atlanta, you know, to demonstrate that this organization was about basic business principles along with our mission, it made the task much easier.

Stan Dawson: [00:32:27] Now, again, when I discovered the $60,000 debt and what I hadn’t said so far, the population we were working with in metro Atlanta is a population that most citizens, just like in Cleveland, Ohio or L.A. or San Francisco, it’s a population that a lot of folks already have preconceived notions about. So, you can imagine – and I never thought of myself as a sales person – the amount of effort going in to having to change minds about that situation we call homelessness in America, to then turn around and ask them to get on this particular train to help make life better.

Stan Dawson: [00:33:25] But, again, to answer your question, Mike, because of my business background, that I could take that and I could marry it up to my incredible passion for what I was being asked to do. It took a while to get rid of that debt, but it turned into a win-win situation. And, thankfully, when I left the organization, its balance sheet was over a million dollars.

Mike Blake: [00:33:55] All right. Well, congratulations. Now, at least let me ask you sort of a similar question, but a little bit differently. As you joined your nonprofit and you’ve got to sell it over those three months, what skill did you learn was the most valuable? What skill did you bring to the table walking in that said maybe people said to you, “Thank goodness you know how to do this because we really need help here”?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:34:21] Gotcha. So, yeah, it’s different from the first world to the world now. So, I would say it was having that sales management experience. That and, honestly, you would think that nonprofits are just, I wouldn’t say well- managed, but they think that they’re happy places. Everyone must be happy. They love Jesus or, hopefully, with a good mission. But it doesn’t mean that’s always the case. So, part of what I brought was my positivity that I didn’t realize people so desperately wanted. And the other part was the experience in sales management that could help with philanthropy and communications.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:35:09] But then, I need to piggyback off of what Stan said, I realized the more I got involved in nonprofit, that there were a number of individuals leading departments and organizations who didn’t have the business background and it did caused issues. And so, there was a real benefit having someone with my banking finance leadership experience. It really did help fill a gap that wasn’t always being filled in a nonprofit. So, definitely that’s critical.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:35:40] And I also agree with Stan that, if you do decide to go into nonprofit, it’s good to ask a lot of really good challenging questions. Because don’t expect there to be more transparency in a nonprofit in terms of their challenges as opposed to a for-profit. Just because, you know, maybe it’s a Christian organization does not mean that they’re going to share everything that you probably should know. And so, you’ve got to ask those tough questions. Don’t make assumptions.

Mike Blake: [00:36:12] So, at least you said something that to I want to capitalize on a little bit. You know, I do think there’s a conception, there’s a bias, or even a stereotype that nonprofits are sort of happy, la vita dolce kind of places because you don’t have the pressure cooker of being on Wall Street. And as if there’s just those two extremes and nothing in between. And, you know, having been involved pretty heavily in one nonprofit in particular that was struggling, I think the morale in a nonprofit can actually be much more challenging than in an organization, especially if things aren’t going well.

Mike Blake: [00:37:02] And I say that because, you know, in a business organization, if things aren’t going well, I think you have a lot more tools available to turn things around. I, as a practice leader can say, “Well, I’m going to work harder. I’m going to sell more projects. I’m going to get more revenue in the door by cutting prices,” whatever. I’m glad John Ray is not here, he would cut me off if I said that. But whatever it takes, I have more tools available to me.

Mike Blake: [00:37:26] But with a nonprofit, when things aren’t going well, I think nonprofits have a little bit of a harder time turning things around because, first of all, the revenue cycle is so different. You know, typically, you have narrow windows of opportunity to bring in new revenue. And, also, I think because people in nonprofits, like you, they typically join nonprofit because they’re so mission driven. If they feel that mission being constrained, I think it can be very demoralizing as well. And so, I love both you and Stan to comment on that. Is it, in fact, more difficult in some cases to maintain morale inside of a nonprofit?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:38:14] Yes. I would say yes. And apologies to any nonprofits I worked for in the past, but, honestly, I would say the morale was better in my for-profit experiences than my nonprofit. And part of that was some of the clunkyness of the experience. Or even, you know, maybe a little bit more focus on the mission and a little bit less on taking care of the people.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:38:41] And, for me, my passion is to see people thrive both globally and my team. And so, we’re very holistic with the international mission. And so, I wanted to be holistic with our U.S. Team as well. So, just to share with folks who might be interested in this, we are going through a dream manager training program.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:39:04] Matthew Kelly wrote this book called Dream Manager, and it’s about really unpacking the dreams of your team, both personal and professional. And if you can help them focus on that and actually even make adjustments to your own organization culturally in policies and things where it makes sense. You know, in one case, there was a large organization that had low skilled people and they were out all the time, but it was because they couldn’t get to work. He ended up having a shuttle where people met at different hubs and then, suddenly, morale and attendance was higher. So, being more sensitive to the needs of your people in a very intentional way.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:39:39] And so, I reached out to Matthew Kelly and we were invited to go through the training. It’s a year process. And we’re going to embed it in our culture. But that’s because I feel like it’s kind of hypocritical to say, “Hey, we’re helping people in these remote, unreached areas to thrive and then not addressing the needs of our own organization.” So, I think that’s part of the rub where we get so wrapped up in the mission that maybe sometimes we forget we have a mission to the people within our U.S. Group as well. I can’t speak for everybody org, but that’s been my perception with some.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:40:11] And, hey, if you’re a nonprofit and you know you had to make these sacrifices, so what if you can’t pay your mortgage or you don’t have medical benefits, right? But then, you don’t have a thriving team and it’s going to end up playing out in production and everything else.

Mike Blake: [00:40:27] Stan, anything you’d like to add to that?

Stan Dawson: [00:40:29] Well, yes. I wouldn’t disagree with anything she said there. But when I got to Crossroads, there were several staff members with college degrees that were not totally in touch with the population we served. So, they had already reached the negative morale point, if you will. One of my first challenges was to remake the staff. There were a couple of folks that were already there that were top notch and fully empathized with the population we were working with.

Stan Dawson: [00:41:12] But I really flipped the switch at Crossroads in that I started to employ people that had come to us to receive our services, meaning formerly folks who were homeless, men and women. That was probably, in all my years, the smartest management decision I made because it made my job so much easier in that, if you’ll excuse the expression, I got rid of a whole lot of BS much sooner than if a bunch of degree people had sat down and tried to figure all that out. So, I was really fortunate.

Stan Dawson: [00:41:58] And it wasn’t that I had some kind of special training to know to do that. It just made common sense to me. And then, long term, the benefit of that is that the people that were financially supporting us really warmed up to the fact that, “Wait a minute. You had former people coming to you for service and now they’re moving into the workforce?” So, it turned into a real bonus. I didn’t anticipate that. I just did it because I thought they’ve been there. They know what it is I’m trying to raise money and resources for. So, let me listen to them about what the geography looks like.

Mike Blake: [00:42:51] So, are there any skills or abilities that you developed in business that maybe you wish you could use more? Stan, anything come to mind? Something that you don’t use as much, maybe as much as you thought of, as much as you would like to?

Stan Dawson: [00:43:14] I don’t want to sound like a broken record here – and I’ll just name it – that be it God or the Holy Spirit placed it in my life, the intangible that I keep referring to is that word passion. And so, I went to school and learned the business school, I ran a business, so I learned those skill sets. So, with that luggage in hand, the passion was already there. But I would never, never in my wildest expectations taken on a job like this without that passion, that commitment to the mission that was there. I know that sounds awfully simplistic but –

Mike Blake: [00:44:08] Well, look, I think to be fair, there’s a lot to it. My favorite business book – period. There’s no tie. There’s no close second – Start with Why by Simon Sinek. And the fundamental thesis of that book – and by the way, I have an uncomfortable man crush on Simon Sinek. My dream is to get him on this podcast. He will never come. But his core thesis, people don’t buy what you do, they buy why you do it. And that’s not just customers, but also the people that you work with.

Mike Blake: [00:44:39] And, you know, you spoke of something about how you hired and that you actually hired from your clientele, if you will. And there was a case study that either in Simon’s book – I call him Simon. He calls me who the heck are you? – or the successor book, Find Your Why, they talked about a study of actually a telemarketing firm that did fundraising for nonprofits – no. It was a hospital that did fundraising. So, they have a benevolent fund for patients, that’s what it was. And they found that simply by bringing in people to meet the telemarketers who had been helped by that program, that their effectiveness went up by something like 30 percent.

Stan Dawson: [00:45:36] Absolutely.

Mike Blake: [00:45:37] Because it just gave people a sense as to why they were doing it. It became real. So, that organization made it a point to bring in somebody who had been helped by the program once a month to talk to everybody. And that was as motivating as anybody. And in fact, an interesting thing is that, it actually turned the lower performers into the highest performers. Because they had a [inaudible] that some people that just like telemarketing. If they hadn’t done it for them, they would have done it in a boiler room someplace. And they were just going to call people to get money because that’s the way they were wired.

Mike Blake: [00:46:10] But for other people that did sort of face that call reluctance, if you will, being enrolled in a higher calling purpose or mission, all of a sudden, made them go from being the bottom performers to the top performers. So, for what it’s worth, I think that completely meshes with the empirical data that’s out there in terms of how that can be very powerful and transformative decision.

Stan Dawson: [00:46:36] It certainly worked for us.

Mike Blake: [00:46:43] We’re talking to Elisa Goodwin and Stan Dawson. And the topic is, Should I get a job with a nonprofit? And I like both your answer this, so each of you should answer it, what in your mind is the most common misconception or misunderstanding about working for a nonprofit? What do most people think working for a nonprofit is like that really isn’t true at all?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:47:13] I just recently heard a perception that, you are not going to get the same quality experience because you’ve got people in nonprofit who maybe couldn’t make the cut in for-profit. And that you’re not going to get paid what you’re worth. And I think both of those are true and not true. It just depends on the organization like anywhere else. And this is at least in a small nonprofit. And I’ve worked in small and large ones.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:47:47] In a relatively small organization, it reminds me of a small bank environment where you got to wear a lot of different hats. So, it really exposed you to a lot of areas that otherwise you may not. In a commercial bank, you’re siloed. And in a really large nonprofit, typically, you have your scope of responsibility and you don’t go beyond that typically. And so, I think it can really challenge you and allow you to see what you enjoy most and then grow on that.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:48:17] I think the disadvantage is that, in most nonprofits – I want to make sure people hear this – you will get a lot of good experience, but you won’t necessarily have a lot of time to continue to grow except in the practical application within the job. You know, one out of the five or six that I worked at really was already so solid in their infrastructure and workings that you have the space to maybe get higher education and different things. But in most of them, they oftentimes refer to it as, we’re building the plane while we’re flying it, which makes it a lot more difficult to get the additional refinement of your skills, but you will get a lot through experience.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:48:59] So, I would say from that perspective, there’s plus and minuses. And from the standpoint of salary, I think it could go either way. I see people who are overpaid in the industry and I see people who are underpaid. So, either way, I mean, it’s just hit or miss depending on where you end up working. And that’s up to you in terms of how well you vet the organizations that you choose to apply to.

Mike Blake: [00:49:27] Stan, how about you? Any misconceptions about working for a nonprofit you’d like to dispel our audience of?

Stan Dawson: [00:49:33] Well, at least in the arena I was in, in metro Atlanta, the nonprofit industry as a whole, the level of water has gone up, not down. Meaning, more and more organizations where they don’t survive are providing a living wage with decent benefits. When I got to Crossroads, there was not anything other than sort of indirectly connected health insurance policy, but that was it. But most nonprofits now that have any kind of a history, at least in the homeless arena, are paying a livable wage, have benefits, and it’s not like it was 25 years ago.

Stan Dawson: [00:50:29] Now, what I discovered at Crossroads, the other emotional side of it, all of us are human beings. We all bleed red blood. But the pressure of the arena I was in can be very intense, almost on a daily basis. So, you don’t have a ton of happy faces running around and smiling and patting each other on the back. But for those that have the passion down deep, they emotionally do just fine.

Mike Blake: [00:51:17] You know, we’re running out of time here and I want to make sure you guys can get back to serving your constituency and fulfilling your missions. But a question I did want to get to is, you know, for somebody who’s out there thinking about joining a nonprofit and moving their career into the nonprofit sector, whether temporarily or permanently, what in your mind is the biggest risk of doing that? Is there a risk to doing that? And if so, what is the biggest one in your minds?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:51:44] Well, first, they need to realize that the grass is not greener on the other side. It really is important for them to examine the whys behind what they’re thinking about doing. If it’s just because they’re not happy with the job and they have, maybe, unrealistic expectations that things are going to be rosier in a nonprofit, that’s not a good reason to do it. If, as Stan said, they’ve got a passion and they really want to invest their talents in a mission that’s going to resonate for them, that’s awesome.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:52:16] But, also, if they think that they’re not doing enough in their current job, I would challenge them to consider how to mobilize the opportunities that they do have. You know, if they’re making a lot of money, we need them. Stan and I in nonprofit, need them to fund the work and to be board members and different things.

Elisa Goodwin: [00:52:36] You know, they can be thought in, like, if you will, in their current situation, there are a lot of business leaders who are Christians who helped to empower and bless and be a light to their own corporations as well as to the business community at large. So, I would just challenge them to make sure that they’re making the decision for the right reason, because they can get that same satisfaction by continuing in a role in for-profit. But if they do decide that they want to be a part of it, I would not let them be deterred by the thought of, “Well, I’m not going to make the same amount of money.”

Elisa Goodwin: [00:53:13] I have yet to meet someone who’s going from for-profit to nonprofit who doesn’t talk about, “Well, I don’t know if I’m ready to take a pay cut.” Don’t walk in anticipating a pay cut. Do your homework, there’s a lot of data – I’d be happy to share some with you – so you can see what the typical salaries are and the ranges. Be aggressive to get what you deserve. There’s a chance not everybody is like, “Man, it’s going to take a big pay cut.” So, don’t let that deter you. But, you know, make the decision for the right reasons.

Mike Blake: [00:53:42] Stan, how about you?

Stan Dawson: [00:53:44] Elisa detailed it very well. Though I will go back, you’re going to stop calling me Stan and start calling me passion. But particularly what I was called to do, on a scale of one to ten, I’d have to measure where that passion was. Now, doing that involves a lot more than a resume. It involves a lot of building relationship with another person before you employ them. But if that passion level, because the work is too hard, is too challenging, you get slapped in the face way too many times against that backdrop. If their passion meter is not 8.5 to 10, they’re not going to last. And you’re doing them a disservice as well as the organization.

Mike Blake: [00:54:51] Stan and Elisa, this has been a great conversation. We’re running out of time and there are a lot more questions that we could have covered, but just enough time to. Would it be okay if somebody wants to contact you maybe to go deeper into a question we covered or cover a question that we didn’t? And if so, what’s the best way for them to contact you?

Elisa Goodwin: [00:55:09] For me, the best way is elisa, E-L-I-S-A, @missionhope.org.

Mike Blake: [00:55:17] Stan?

Stan Dawson: [00:55:17] And for me, it’s lowercase letters, S-A-D-6-6-7@icloud.com.

Mike Blake: [00:55:31] Okay. Well, thank you. And that’s going to wrap it up for today’s program, I’d like to thank Elisa Goodwin and Stan Passion Dawson so much for joining us today and sharing their expertise with us today.

Mike Blake: [00:55:41] We’ll be exploring a new topic each week, so please tune so that when you’re faced with your next business decision, you have clear vision when making it. If you enjoy these podcasts, please consider leaving a review with your favorite podcast aggregator. It helps people find us that we can help them. If you would like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. Once again, this is Mike Blake. Our sponsor is Brady Ware & Company. And this has been the Decision Vision podcast.

 

Tagged With: Brady Ware & Company, crossroads, Crossroads Community Ministries, Elisa Goodwiin, Michael Blake, Mike Blake, Mission: Hope, Nonprofit, Nonprofit / Faith-based, Stan Dawson

The Art of Improv and Business – An Interview with Andrea Flack-Wetherald (Inspiring Women, Episode 32)

May 11, 2021 by John Ray

Andrea-Flack-Wetherald-Inspiring-Women-Album
Inspiring Women PodCast with Betty Collins
The Art of Improv and Business - An Interview with Andrea Flack-Wetherald (Inspiring Women, Episode 32)
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Andrea-Flack-Wetherald-Inspiring-Women-Album

The Art of Improv and Business – An Interview with Andrea Flack-Wetherald (Inspiring Women, Episode 32)

Andrea Flack-Wetherald joined host Betty Collins to share her journey from corporate to comedy to mindful improv. She shared why she teaches curiosity over judgment, how she helps teams improve communications and their overall effectiveness, and much more. “Inspiring Women” is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

Betty’s Show Notes

“Improv, in one sense, is being present in this moment with curiosity instead of judgment and being empowered to know that I have the ability to build something different if I don’t like how it is right now.”

My guest, Andrea Flack-Wetherald, loves improv. She discovered it during a particularly acute season of personal and professional transition.

She also loves mindfulness practice. Combining the fun of improv with the quiet power of mindfulness is the work she does with her clients. Her company, &Beyond, helps elevate company teams to a new level of effective production.

Mindful improv, it sounds scary to a lot of people. In this episode, you’re going to learn the difference between habits and circumstances. And you’re really going to learn that this not just changing you but changing culture. And about the stories that we develop in our minds about people, or the company we work for, or the culture we live in.

And by the way, you’ve been improvising all your life. So this isn’t something new to learn, it’s just recognizing it’s a part of you.

This is THE podcast that advances women toward economic, social and political achievement. Hosted by Betty Collins, CPA, and Director at Brady Ware and Company. Betty also serves as the Committee Chair for Empowering Women, and Director of the Brady Ware Women Initiative. Each episode is presented by Brady Ware and Company, committed to empowering women to go their distance in the workplace and at home.

For more information, go to the Resources page at Brady Ware and Company.

Remember to follow this podcast on Apple Podcasts and Google Podcasts.  And forward our podcast along to other Inspiring Women in your life.

TRANSCRIPT

00:00:00] Betty Collins
Today, I’m going to go out on a limb, taking on a subject matter that I know really not a lot about, but I’m intrigued by it. The topic is mindful improv. I have an expert today who’s going to educate my audience, but they’re also going to- she’s going to educate me. So, we’ll see how this goes. We’ll see how improv we are. If you want different results in your business, though, maybe you need to do something different, and that would apply to any area of your life. So, taking a chance on a new approach, maybe that’s just what you need to do, or at least be open to it.

[00:00:39] Betty Collins
So, what attracts me to this guest is the different approach for a very common issue that we all have in business, and certainly in our society, which is conflict and division. And maybe we just need to navigate through these times we live, with a different method and approach. The overall goal when she goes in and helps businesses or places, even nonprofits, we’ll talk about that, is to help the leaders in that business navigate conflict effectively, and restore unity in the group, and ultimately achieve whatever their goal is together, and I say that in all caps, if you saw this on one of my social media accounts.

[00:01:26] Betty Collins
My guest is a professional woman with a lot of passion, who I know because of her dad. We went to the same college back in 1984, so it tells you how old I am, and probably how old she is. And he introduced us thinking we might be a good pair. I have great stories about Ron, but we’ll focus on improv instead. Andrea Flack-Wetherald holds a BSW from Bluffton University, and spent the early part of her career working on a research project, focused on addiction-related behavior.

[00:02:04] Betty Collins
Andrea gained training and performance experience as an improviser in Pittsburgh in New York City, before beginning to investigate that they overlap, maybe, between an improv ability to adapt to rapid change, and the scientific aspects of behavior. Again, I told you this was going to be a lot different. The evidence-based methods, though, studied by scientists in helping the professions, and the very practical skills improvisers use to build confidence, collaboration and effective communication in rapidly-changing environments.

[00:02:37] Betty Collins
The result is a unique, immersive learning experience that has been transforming, empowering leaders, HR personnel, and those cultural stakeholders for the past four years. It’s really what she’s built her company on. Outside of her corporate work, Andrea founded the Peace Building Conspirators, which is a diverse, multifaith, non-partisan, online community. Listen to that. Let’s say it again, a diverse, multifaith, non-partisan, online community that’s dedicated to the uses of mindful improv for healing relationships across the political divide, and building a peaceful, just beautiful future for our country.

[00:03:20] Betty Collins
That’s another whole podcast for another time, but what a great way to give back to your community, and to something that’s really needed. So, I have some questions, definitely, for you, but welcome today, Andrea. I know that you are in process of doing school at home, getting to your office, having all those things. So, before we get into the questions, just tell us a little about you.

[00:03:50] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
So, I’m Ron’s daughter, as you know noted. And it was interesting leaving the Canton Nazarene community when I moved here to Pittsburgh, because it was the first time that saying, “Ron’s last daughter,” didn’t really mean anything to people. So, I had to grow to this point with my own chance, so to speak. But in all seriousness, my husband and I have lived here in Pittsburgh for about 11 years. We met at a small Mennonite school in Western Ohio, and then came to the big city.

[00:04:32] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
That’s kind of a joke because Pittsburgh is not that huge of a city, but compared to the small Mennonite community where we lived, it’s ginormous. And yeah, we’ve just been building our lives together, figuring out what we’re going to do with our careers, and with our passions. And we were fortunate in 2019 to adopt our two children after a pretty long journey with foster care, that was really hard, but also very informative about really what mindful improv is to me.

[00:05:05] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
It really gave me an interesting opportunity to put some of these ideas about engaging vulnerable, delicate, high-stakes confrontation, really put that stuff to the test because there are few circumstances I’ve encountered that are as uncomfortable, and as delicate as the experience of being in family court, and the experience of navigating our children’s birth family, and wanting to really do a good job of honoring who these people are to them, while at the same time acknowledging some of the adult realities that they don’t understand.

[00:05:40] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Anyhow, there’s a lot of perspectives that have fed into the work that I do. But I think it’s all connected, we’re all human people, and it’s been really fascinating. There were a few trainings or speaking engagements and things in some of those really tough chapters of our foster care experience, where I would be crying in my car and then have to pull it together, and go in, and do this work.

[00:06:05] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
I found that the more often that I was just real about that energy at the beginning, the more frequently people would be like, “You know what, we’re actually a foster family, too.” Or, “I grew up in foster care.” Behind the nametag, behind the job title, this person isn’t just the chief bean counter at XYZ company, they’re a human person. And these experiences are more shared than we realize.
Anyhow, that’s a lot of information to a short question, but I think it’s all [CROSSTALK]

[00:06:31] Betty Collins
That’s okay. It’s actually a great set to go to the questions, because this is personal for you, as well as this is what you do professionally. So, it all connects. So, I love your who-are-you? story. It went long, but okay. I’m good.

[00:06:50] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
The work that I’m teaching other people, it’s not just stuff that sounds good, it’s stuff that I have to use in my daily life. So, I swear by it because I see it work.

[00:07:00] Betty Collins
Well, how did you end up then? You were in corporate America, and you went to comedy. Let’s start there.

[00:07:07] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
A left turn not many people in my life saw coming. So, when I was working at the Behavioral Change, the research study that you mentioned when you were reading my bio, it was focused on smoking cessation, but certainly focused on a variety of aspects, of when someone is experiencing addiction and trying to make a behavior change. While I was working there, I had this idea for a tech startup. And so, I was, in the evenings, working on this idea with one of my coworkers, who also worked at the study. We’re pitching at Startup Weekend and doing all this, and we actually won.

[00:07:50] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Part of our package that we won was a membership to the Pittsburgh Tech Council. They offered this free training that was called Improv for CEOs. And even though I was 23 and didn’t know what I was doing at all, I was technically the CEO of this idea, in any way that you can be the CEO of an idea. So, I got to go to this workshop, and I went- honestly, I don’t know what possessed me to go to this thing, other than I love to connect with people through laughter, and it seemed like it would be fun.

[00:08:21] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
A lot of my life was just burning the candle at both ends, and so, I think I just wanted a little break. So, I was prepared for it to be fun, I was not prepared for it to be so meaningful. And it was like, we got in there and it’s all about being in the moment, and listening beyond your comfort zone, and being sacrificial in the way you’d support your scene partners, even if you don’t totally understand their ideas yet. Even if you’re sure that they’re wrong or they misheard the audience suggestion. So, being brave enough to offer your own contributions, instead of just hanging out on the sidelines, watching other people do it.

[00:08:59] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
So, there’s all these skills that were happening in the moment, and I was watching these other CEOs. I called them real CEOs at the time, but I’ve listened to another [INAUDIBLE] -centered podcasts since then, to know I shouldn’t say that. You know I’m watching these grown, adult men be silly in front of each other, and watching the sweat, the sweat on their temples as they decide whether or not they were seriously going to let their guard down, and be vulnerable in that way in front of people in their professional network.

[00:09:31] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
And I just sat there thinking, “Oh, my God. This is way bigger than what anyone in this room maybe sees.” These skills will change these people’s lives. If they sign up for improv classes and they keep doing this for real, we are going to learn a whole new way for being professionals in America. And so, that’s how I got started. This idea planted in my brain, and I was like, “Doug, what we’re doing here, these are evidence-based.”

[00:10:01] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
We understand the benefits of mindfulness practice, for example. We understand from a social science perspective what’s happening in someone’s brain when they really try to become something different than what they’ve been before. We understand what is happening when they jump from one bucket to the next, in this then, theoretical model, which I don’t know how far down the rabbit hole we want to go on this interview.

[00:10:29] Betty Collins
But I think that you’ve explained- obviously, you were in corporate America, already using science, already very aware of science on behavior. And then you saw comedy people, and letting their guard down. But if you could wrap your- in one sentence. Wrap for me or say, “My mindful improv is-,” how would you break that into one sentence? Because we’ve got to give people insight, because it’s not common.

[00:11:04] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
So, mindful improv is being present in the current moment, and first of all, choosing curiosity instead of judgment, about whatever is happening around you. That’s the first part; choosing curiosity instead of judgment. That’s the mindfulness piece. The improv piece is very empowering, because that’s about the understanding that, this will be what I build it to be.

[00:11:32] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
I am creating this in this moment alongside somebody else. It’s not prescribed for me, we’re building it together. So, it’s, mindful improv in one sentence is, being present in this moment with curiosity instead of judgment, and being empowered to know that I have the ability to build something different if I don’t like how it is right now.

[00:11:55] Betty Collins
Got it. So, what I want you to do after this podcast is email that to me, because I want that somewhere on my wall. I love how that rolls. And that’s a great way to say it. It definitely gives my audience in me, “Okay, now, that all makes sense. Wow.” And at the same time, you’re going, “That’s a lot. That’s a lot to think on.” So, my podcast is to inspire women, and I have a lot who are business owners, or they’re women in business, or they just, for whatever reason, like listening to Betty Collins ramble, I don’t know. But how can we apply mindful improv to business? What’s the connection?

[00:12:40] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
So, there are lots and lots of connections, and there are some that are more superficial than others. I started out with the business application of sales, because when I worked in corporate, I was the director of marketing at a different company here in Pittsburgh. And I was getting sales calls all day long from people, and just thinking, I would feel so much less throat-punchy if any of these people had taken an improv class, and they were actually listening to me, instead of just reading from a script.

[00:13:12] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
It’s so irritating to feel like we are not having a human conversation right now. So, my first instinct was, let me teach sales to people, and help them have a normal human being connection, as they’re doing business development, basically. So, that was my first inclination, but as I started doing that, I realized, “Well, what I really care about so much more is empathetic leaders who care so much about culture, helping them build a culture that consistently is in alignment with their values.”

[00:13:47] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Because as I started going into companies, what I realized is, even when people- when their employers, or whatever are telling you that there’s such a toxic culture, and whatever, what I’ve realized is that I go into the office, and on occasion, it’s been my job to have the hard conversation that others don’t want to have with a certain leader, or whatever. I’m expecting cloven hooves and a tail, based on what people have been saying. Then I get in there and realize it is not their intention for it to be this way. They’re more aware than they realize- than other people realize, is what I meant to say, ofthe cultural issues, and their role in it.

[00:14:27] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
More often than not, when you give someone an environment that’s safe to be real, and they don’t feel like they have to be defensive and whatever, they’ll be honest. Most people are not stupid. People tell me all the time, “So-and-so is a sociopath,” or, “They’re, whatever.” People love to tell me that everyone is a narcissist. And as a social worker, I’m like, “Okay, well, that’s a diagnosable personality disorder.” I don’t actually think that the majority of leaders, or the majority of managers are narcissists, or sociopaths, or whatever.

[00:15:00] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Anyhow, the deepest application for me that I have chosen to use, because like I said, there are a lot of them, when it just comes to, “Help us be more creative in our quarterly planning meeting or whatever.” I used to do that type of thing. But now, what I really care about is, build a culture that consistently matches your values. And how we do that is by modeling that behavior, day in and day out, of being vulnerable, and in the way that you handle confrontation.

[00:15:31] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Because culture is really determined- it’s not determined by the posters on your wall. It’s really determined by the moments when people are being vulnerable, and how you respond to that. So, vulnerable is, we’re brainstorming and I’m pitching an idea that’s bold. Instead of a safe vanilla idea, I’m pitching something that feels a little bit scary. How is that received? Don’t ask people for amazing ideas if they know they’re going to get laughed at, even a little bit. Those, we call them micro aggressions, that let people know, “Oh, really? Your vulnerability is not welcome here. Your dangerous idea, no, thanks.”

[00:16:10] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
How do you respond when people are advocating for themselves, when they’re saying, I need paternity leave, or whatever the case may be? I want this type of opportunity, I want a promotion, I want a raise. What is the infrastructure for you to consistently be who you intend to be, day in and day out? So, some of these things might sound really tactical, but the reality is, if it were so easy to just implement, have your HR person implement a checklist, everyone would have done it by now. The reality is that, in between the checklist is a lot of improv. I’ve never said it like that before, but I’m really glad I just did it, because I mean it.

[00:16:47] Betty Collins
I love that.

[00:16:47] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
In between those checklist components is improv, and it’s how you respond in your day-to-day communication with people, how you show up, what is people’s lived experience with you as a leader? And so much of that is about mindful improv; being in the moment, being present in the moment with curiosity instead of judgment, and giving yourself permission to build something different than what you thought you were building five minutes ago.

[00:17:15] Betty Collins
Well, I would tell you that you probably surprise a lot of your clients when you do get there, and you give that much openness and that much freedom, is what I hear. So, probably, there’s a little bit of, “Hey, this is terrifying,” right?

[00:17:34] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Yeah.

[00:17:34] Betty Collins
So, most people would think of this as terrifying. Even my audience might well be hearing you, going, “This would be a scary thing, or never work in my office.”

[00:17:42] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
To do improv, yes.

[00:17:42] Betty Collins
So, what do you say to people who say, “This will never work in our office, and they would be way too intimidated and this is terrifying.” What would you say to them, simply to get them to consider it?

[00:17:58] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Well, the first thing that I would say is, you’ve been an improviser your whole life. We’ve all been doing improv, improv isn’t scary. We are improvising right now. Nobody was given a playbook on how their life was going to go the day they were born. You’ve been improvising since your very first infantile desire to connect with another person; those first smiles, the first time you realized, when I do this, my parents laugh.

[00:18:25] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
You’ve been improvising your entire life, you couldn’t be more equipped to be a fantastic improviser. What’s scary is performance. That’s what’s scary; feeling put on the spot, and, “Oh, I better say something funny.” So, most of the time when people say they’re scared of improv, what they’re really scared of is performance. Because, as I’ve said, we’ve been improvising our whole lives.

[00:18:47] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
So, in order to make these workshops push people to the perfect point where they’re out of their comfort zone, which is critical; we have to be vulnerable, we have to be courageous, but we don’t need to be traumatized. And so, to toe that line, I’ve just removed the performance component. So, all of the activities that happen, happen in a way that is psychologically safe, as we say, in the world of social science, to make sure people feel like they can participate without being put on the spot.

[00:19:15] Betty Collins
And you’ve always intrigued me as I’ve watched you on LinkedIn, or seen this subject matter, and certainly for a CPA. And at the same time, this type of method, this type of mindset could really, I think, change your organization, change that culture, which then changes the organization. So, I just wanted my audience to know more about it. My last question for you, Andrea, is, what is the most important thing that you’ve learned as an improviser, now that you’ve done all your life, but actually been intentional about it as a company in a profession, that you see has helped leaders in the professional setting?

[00:19:56] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
It really is the curiosity over judgment piece. And sometimes, that’s difficult to hear, or sometimes, better said, sometimes it’s more receivable to say curiosity instead of certainty. Because I think people are like, “I’m not judgmental, I’m open-minded.” And everyone wants to talk about innovation. So, the reality is that, when you walk in, and you’re certain that you know what kind of person you’re dealing with. And so, it’s about the story that we’ve been telling ourselves.

[00:20:25] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
I think the most, what I’ve heard in the feedback, because, of course, I do evaluations every time. And so, what I’ve heard in the feedback is that, the most impactful component of this is the permission and the tools for changing the story you tell yourself, about your boss or your team, or, “I’m not going to start working on this project that I think we really need to be working on at this company, whatever it is, until I have such-and-such a person in place.” We got to get these problems ironed out.

[00:20:57] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
The story there, is, it’s not perfect yet. I don’t have the perfect team in place. I can very clearly see the ways that different people are imperfect, the way that Todd is ruining our culture, or whatever it is. There’s always this very clear story people have been telling themselves, and they’re so used to telling that story. And it’s like, “Listen, you might have evidence,” and they always do.

[00:21:21] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
They always are like, “Do you want to see the emails? I can prove it. You’re not going to believe what he said to me.” And I’m like, “I believe you. I’m not here to tell you that you’re a liar.” I’m here to say that we are all more than the worst thing about us. And if we wait forever, if we wait for perfect scene partners in order to make bold choices, in order to get started on being the kind of culture, the kind of team that we want to be, if we’re waiting for perfect circumstances, you’re going to wait forever, and you will never get started.”

[00:21:50] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
The other piece of advice that I always give people, that I think is pretty critical in this work, is that, habits don’t change as quickly as circumstances do. And really, all of the things that I teach people, I tell people in every training, I don’t talk about listening skills, I talk about listening hygiene because a skill is like driving a stick shift or playing the piano. After a while, you can phone it in; you don’t have to be present-minded with it.

[00:22:16] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
That’s not what listening is, that’s not what improv is, that’s not what communicating is. You need to be present in this moment, and it’s more like hygiene. You didn’t get to learn about showering in sixth grade or whenever you do your hygiene stuff, and be like, “Sweet, I’m clean now.” It takes proactive effort every day, or you’re going to stink. That won’t be because something’s wrong with you, it’ll be because your body is functioning as it should.

[00:22:40] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
And so, when we see people and they’re, “stinky”, for the purposes of this analogy, it’s really easy to get stuck proving to yourself, and proving to anyone who will listen to you, that they stink, that they have fallen off with their listening hygiene, their communication hygiene, instead of realizing, “Okay. Well, how can I encourage hygiene? Maybe I can provide soap, instead of deciding that this person isn’t worth my time, or that this is a critical problem.”

[00:22:40] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Those habits that you make of deciding what kind of person you’re dealing with, and then getting married to that story, those habits don’t change as quickly as circumstances do. That person could leave your team tomorrow, and you will still be the kind of person, to use your own language, “That’s just decided, I’m going to commit to this narrative. I am going to be constantly stacking people up, and evaluating, and deciding who’s worth my time and investment, and who’s not.” Or, “I’m the kind of leader that is looking for problems instead of solutions.” Do you get what I’m saying?

[00:23:48] Betty Collins
Oh, I do.

[00:23:50] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Those habits that you make in your brain, they don’t change as fast as circumstances do. I had a client who was stuck on this awful hamster wheel with this investor that they hated, and they had grown from- these numbers are not exactly- it was something like 15 employees to 70 employees in a year, which in startup world is just insane.

[00:24:08] Betty Collins
That was crazy.

[00:24:08] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
And so, that changes everything about your culture. So, I was working with the newly-hired HR person about, how can we address some of these culture issues? And when I was talking with their leaders, they were like, “Well, we can’t really do anything about this, because this investor, this investor, this investor.” And it’s like, “In six months this person might not be here, and you’re still building a culture where we’re pretty much addicted to worry, at this point.” Anyhow, so I didn’t mean to ramble, you can cut the last five minutes out of your time.

[00:24:38] Betty Collins
No, that’s perfectly fine. You fit in right with my podcast, it’s what I do. But I do want to wrap it up. First, I want to say thank you for coming today, in between virtual school, or kids home school, and your office, and all the stuff that is going on. And spending time with my audience is very appreciated. And again, I want you to leave them with that one sentence on what is mindful improv, because I love it, but I will never be able to say it back. So, to just give us that last tidbit.

[00:25:09] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Absolutely. So, mindful improv is, first of all, being present in this moment with curiosity instead of judgment.

[00:25:09] Betty Collins
Got it.

[00:25:18] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
And second of all, being empowered to know that you are currently building whatever is going to come next, and you have the freedom to decide what will happen next. You’re building it with your scene partner, it’s not decided for you.

[00:25:32] Betty Collins
That’s perfect. Now, how could we find you? I know you’re probably on all kinds of social media platforms, and your contact information, but give us the place that just gets us to you. What’s your website?

[00:25:46] Andrea Flack-Wetherald
Andbeyondimprov.com is where you can go. If you’re interested in doing an improv workshop, that’s great. I do a lot of- well, in a pre- pandemic world, I loved speaking at events. When events are a thing again, I will be glad to speak at your event. I also do more individual coaching, that’s less of the workshop, improv game stuff, and more, really, down into the heart of leadership. But yeah, you can find all of that information at andbeyondimprov.com.

[00:26:19] Betty Collins
Well, today we learn. If you want different results, try a different approach. I think this has a lot to it, I think we just touched the surface of it today. And we will have all kinds of information about Andrea and her companies that you’ll be able to find on this podcast, so you can connect to her. And I’m Betty Collins, and I’m so glad you joined me today. Inspiring women, it’s what I do. And I leave you with this; being strong speaks of strength, but being courageous speaks to having a will to do more and overcome.

 

Betty Collins, CPA, Brady Ware & Company and Host of the “Inspiring Women” Podcast

Betty Collins is the Office Lead for Brady Ware’s Columbus office and a Shareholder in the firm. Betty joined Brady Ware & Company in 2012 through a merger with Nipps, Brown, Collins & Associates. She started her career in public accounting in 1988. Betty is co-leader of the Long Term Care service team, which helps providers of services to Individuals with Intellectual and Developmental Disabilities and nursing centers establish effective operational models that also maximize available funding. She consults with other small businesses, helping them prosper with advice on general operations management, cash flow optimization, and tax minimization strategies.

In addition, Betty serves on the Board of Directors for Brady Ware and Company. She leads Brady Ware’s Women’s Initiative, a program designed to empower female employees, allowing them to tap into unique resources and unleash their full potential.  Betty helps her colleagues create a work/life balance while inspiring them to set and reach personal and professional goals. The Women’s Initiative promotes women-to-women business relationships for clients and holds an annual conference that supports women business owners, women leaders, and other women who want to succeed. Betty actively participates in women-oriented conferences through speaking engagements and board activity.

Betty is a member of the National Association of Women Business Owners (NAWBO) and she is the President-elect for the Columbus Chapter. Brady Ware also partners with the Women’s Small Business Accelerator (WSBA), an organization designed to help female business owners develop and implement a strong business strategy through education and mentorship, and Betty participates in their mentor match program. She is passionate about WSBA because she believes in their acceleration program and matching women with the right advisors to help them achieve their business ownership goals. Betty supports the WSBA and NAWBO because these organizations deliver resources that help other women-owned and managed businesses thrive.

Betty is a graduate of Mount Vernon Nazarene College, a member of the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants, and a member of the Ohio Society of Certified Public Accountants. Betty is also the Board Chairwoman for the Gahanna Area Chamber of Commerce, and she serves on the Board of the Community Improvement Corporation of Gahanna as Treasurer.

“Inspiring Women” Podcast Series

This is THE podcast that advances women toward economic, social and political achievement. The show is hosted by Betty Collins, CPA; Betty is a Director at Brady Ware & Company. Betty also serves as the Committee Chair for Empowering Women, and Director of the Brady Ware Women Initiative. Each episode is presented by Brady Ware & Company, committed to empowering women to go their distance in the workplace and at home. For more information, go to the Resources page at Brady Ware & Company.

Remember to follow this podcast on Apple Podcasts and Google Podcasts. And forward our podcast along to other Inspiring Women in your life.

The complete “Inspiring Women” show archive can be found here.

Tagged With: Andrea Flack-Wetherald, Betty Collins, Brady Ware, Brady Ware & Company, curiosity, improv, The Art Of Improv And Business

Decision Vision Episode 115:  Should I Become a Caregiver? – An Interview with Rayna Neises, A Season of Caring

May 6, 2021 by John Ray

A Season of Caring
Decision Vision
Decision Vision Episode 115:  Should I Become a Caregiver? - An Interview with Rayna Neises, A Season of Caring
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

A Season of Caring

Decision Vision Episode 115:  Should I Become a Caregiver? – An Interview with Rayna Neises, A Season of Caring

Caregiving might seem like a topic which doesn’t fit a business podcast, yet when the need to act as a caregiver to a parent or other family member arises, a career or business is affected. Rayna Neises, who journeyed through her own seasons of caring with parents affected by Alzheimer’s, joined host Mike Blake to address issues and questions which arise for caregivers in these circumstances. Decision Vision is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

Rayna Neises, Certified Coach/ Author, A Season of Caring

A Season of Caring
Rayna Neises, Coach/Author, A Season of Caring

A Season of Caring is owned and operated by Rayna Neises an ICF Associate Certified Coach with certifications in both Life and Leadership Coaching from the Professional Christian Coaching Institute. She specializes in supporting those who are in a season of caring for an aging parent.  A Season of Caring offers private coaching, monthly online support groups, a variety of workshops with a membership option coming soon.
Caregivers don’t need to aimlessly wander through this season, they can have the guidance and support they need in order to be able to look back with no regrets once they have walked their parent all the way home.

Rayna has also published a book with Morgan James Publishing sharing heartwarming stories and practical takeaways from her experience of caring for her father in the last years of his journey with Alzheimer’s.  No Regrets: Hope for Your Caregiving Season is a must-read.

Rayna is the host of “A Season of Caring”, a weekly podcast where she interviews family caregivers and caring professionals to offer Hope for Living, Loving and Caring with No Regrets to her listeners.

Rayna lost both of her parents to Alzheimer’s disease twenty years apart. After her season of caring for her dad through his journey, she founded A Season of Caring Coaching where she offers encouragement, support, and resources aimed at preventing family caregivers from aimlessly wandering through this important season of life.

Rayna lives on a farm in southeast Kansas with her husband, Ron, and a small pack of dogs. She is the baby of her family, but most would never guess that. She is a former teacher and enjoys crafts of all kinds and spending time with her grandkids most of all.

Mike Blake, Brady Ware & Company

Mike Blake, Host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series

Michael Blake is the host of the Decision Vision podcast series and a Director of Brady Ware & Company. Mike specializes in the valuation of intellectual property-driven firms, such as software firms, aerospace firms, and professional services firms, most frequently in the capacity as a transaction advisor, helping clients obtain great outcomes from complex transaction opportunities. He is also a specialist in the appraisal of intellectual properties as stand-alone assets, such as software, trade secrets, and patents.

Mike has been a full-time business appraiser for 13 years with public accounting firms, boutique business appraisal firms, and an owner of his own firm. Prior to that, he spent 8 years in venture capital and investment banking, including transactions in the U.S., Israel, Russia, Ukraine, and Belarus.

Brady Ware & Company

Brady Ware & Company is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm which helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality. Brady Ware services clients nationally from its offices in Alpharetta, GA; Columbus and Dayton, OH; and Richmond, IN. The firm is growth-minded, committed to the regions in which they operate, and most importantly, they make significant investments in their people and service offerings to meet the changing financial needs of those they are privileged to serve. The firm is dedicated to providing results that make a difference for its clients.

Decision Vision Podcast Series

Decision Vision is a podcast covering topics and issues facing small business owners and connecting them with solutions from leading experts. This series is presented by Brady Ware & Company. If you are a decision-maker for a small business, we’d love to hear from you. Contact us at decisionvision@bradyware.com and make sure to listen to every Thursday to the Decision Vision podcast.

Past episodes of Decision Vision can be found at decisionvisionpodcast.com. Decision Vision is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX®.

Connect with Brady Ware & Company:

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:01] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast series focusing on critical business decisions. Brought to you by Brady Ware & Company. Brady Ware is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm that helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality.

Mike Blake: [00:00:21] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast giving you, the listener, clear vision to make great decisions. In each episode, we discuss the process of decision making on a different topic from the business owners’ or executives’ perspective. We aren’t necessarily telling you what to do, but we can put you in a position to make an informed decision on your own and understand when you might need help along the way.

Mike Blake: [00:00:40] My name is Mike Blake, and I’m your host for today’s program. I’m a director at Brady Ware & Company, a full-service accounting firm based in Dayton, Ohio, with offices in Dayton; Columbus, Ohio; Richmond, Indiana; and Alpharetta, Georgia. Brady Ware is sponsoring this podcast, which is being recorded in Atlanta per social distancing protocols. If you like to engage with me on social media, with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. If you like this podcast, please subscribe on your favorite podcast aggregator, and please consider leaving a review of the podcast as well.

Mike Blake: [00:01:14] Today’s topic is, should I become a caregiver? And this may seem like a strange topic for a business podcast, but, you know, I think this is one of these topics where personal life and corporate life necessarily merge into one another, or maybe collide – might be the better term – into one another. According to estimates from the National Alliance for Caregiving, during the past year, 65.7 million Americans or 29 percent of the U.S. adult population served as family caregivers for an ill or disabled relative. So, that means that there’s a three out of ten chance in a given year that we are going to find ourselves, at a minimum, a caregiving opportunity, if not ultimately a caregiving position.

Mike Blake: [00:02:13] And while some of us may be in a position to simply retire or leave the workforce, not all of us will be. And even if you are in that position, you are going to be forced to make a difficult decision. But the fact of the matter is, I think for most people – I don’t know if it’s a fact. But I certainly think it’s hard to argue – the sudden responsibility that you assume to become a caregiver for another human being is potentially all consuming, all absorbing. And by necessity, just as we do when we are parents, we are going to have to balance the priorities of caring for, if you’re a parent, your children, or as a caregiver for the people under your charge, and your professional responsibilities. And the reality is that on some occasions somebody’s going to lose. Somebody is just not going to get your best because you’re choosing to give your best elsewhere based on whatever your priorities are at that particular time. So, for many of us, this is going to become a real thing.

Mike Blake: [00:03:26] And I have a personal story to share, not nearly on the on the level of that of our guest. But about four years ago, I was visiting my parents in Boston. And the day before I was going to leave, I thought I was going to go take on a Red Sox game. At the very last second, I said, “You know what? It’s just the Tampa Bay Rays anyway, I’m not going to bother. I’ll watch the game at home.” And so, I sat down to watch the game at home. My dad was going to join me. Long story short, he basically had a stroke right in front of me. And, I’ve never seen somebody – frankly, I didn’t know he had a stroke. I just knew something was not right.

Mike Blake: [00:04:09] And my parents live in a fairly large house. My mother was on an entirely different floor. And, you know, long story short, because I was there, an ambulance was at our house within ten minutes. And that, at a minimum, saved his life and also probably saved him from massive brain damage as well. And I believe I’m not the hero of the story. I just happened to be in the right place at the right time and I hit the panic button. That’s all I did.

Mike Blake: [00:04:34] But it did sort of drawn a very sharp focus that, had things gone differently, that I could have been put in a position of being a caregiver. My mother, she’s still independent, but I don’t know that she’d be in a position to do that entirely on her own. But the point is, there before the grace of God, I still have my father, thankfully. And there before the grace of God, I may have been in a caregiver position for a long time. And I live in Atlanta doing that from Boston and it could have been a lot of upheaval.

Mike Blake: [00:05:04] So, it did sort of ram home that that day may be coming for me. At some point, it may be coming for all of us. And as I said, there are business implications to that. So, that’s why I’m doing this topic on a business program, because the decision to care for a family member or not is, perhaps, one of the most consequential decisions you may ever make in your professional life because it will have such far ranging impacts.

Mike Blake: [00:05:33] So, joining us today is Rayna Neises, who is literally one of the nicest people I’ve ever met. And that’s how I remember how to pronounce the name. But she’s founder of a coaching company called A Season of Caring. And she is an ICF, International Coaching Federation, Associate Certified Coach with certifications in both life and leadership coaching from the Professional Christian Coaching Institute. She specializes in supporting those who are in a season of caring for an aging parent. A Season of Caring offers private coaching, monthly online support groups, and a variety of workshops to the membership option coming soon.

Mike Blake: [00:06:09] Rayna has also published a book with Morgan James Publishing, sharing heartwarming stories and practical takeaways from her experience of caring for her father in the last years of his journey with Alzheimer’s Disease. No Regrets: Hope for Your Caregiving Season is a must read, especially if you find yourself as a potential or actual Alzheimer’s caregiver. Rayna is the host of A Season of Caring, a weekly podcast where she interviews family caregivers and caring professionals to offer hope for living, loving, and caring with no regrets to her listeners.

Mike Blake: [00:06:40] Rayna lives on a farm in southeast Kansas with her husband Ron and a small pack of dogs. She is the baby of her family, but most would never guess that. She is a former teacher and enjoys crafts of all kinds and spending time with her grandkids, most of all. I think you’re our first guest from Kansas, so thank you for representing the great State of Kansas. Rayna. welcome to the program.

Rayna Neises: [00:06:59] Thank you. It’s great to be here.

Mike Blake: [00:07:01] So, Rayna, I’ve not had a chance to read your book, and I don’t want you to give us spoilers necessary. But I’d like to invite you to share with our listeners your caregiving journey and how that prompted you then to be an advocate for caregivers and someone who teaches other caregivers how to be the best caregivers they can be.

Rayna Neises: [00:07:27] Well, I have the story actually nobody wants to have. I’ve actually lost both of my parents to Alzheimer’s Disease. I was 16 years old when my mom was diagnosed, she was just 53. And she was able to live at home for the 12 year journey through the disease with my dad, who took the option of early retirement to take care of her in the home. And so, just seven years after her passing, my dad was diagnosed with Alzheimer’s. He lived 14 years with the disease and passed away in his home just in June of ’18.

Rayna Neises: [00:08:04] So, we’ve had caregiving a part of our lives. My sister and I, most of our lives. But definitely for me, when dad was diagnosed, we sat down and had a conversation where he asked to stay at home as long as possible. And so, that was something that we kind of had to define and figure out. And about nine years into his diagnosis, he had cancer, skin cancer, had surgery, and the recovery was just really difficult. He had MRSA and some other complications. And his ability to care for his own daily needs just declined quickly. He was living with his sister at the time and she just couldn’t handle it all.

Rayna Neises: [00:08:45] So, we reached a point as a family that we had to make the decision, what are we going to do? And so, looking at memory care units and just trying to decide what was going to work best. Thankfully, my husband just said, “You know, if you don’t see your dad doing well there, then if you need to move here -” which was 220 miles away from our farm “- to care for him, then you need to do that.” And so, I was able to then stop and say, “Okay. What does this look like?” And make plans to do that and recruit help. And so, with my sister, his sister, and paid caregivers, we were able to keep my dad at home for the last four-and-a-half years of his life.

Rayna Neises: [00:09:21] And through that journey, just like you said, so many times, it’s, you know, how do I do this and be a good employee? How do I do this and be a good boss? There’s so many pieces because it impacts everything of your life. And really being able to navigate that without losing your life and losing things that are important to you, your marriage, your job, your career, all of those things, you have to do it intentionally. And so, after my season of caring for my dad, I just really decided to pivot my business and start to focus in on others that are finding themselves in that place. And that’s how I came up with the book as well, as just really what’s the most important things I need to tell people who are walking this journey or just starting out this journey.

Mike Blake: [00:10:08] So, I’m going to go off script a little bit here, because I think I have a better question than the one I originally thought of, and that is, how do you describe to somebody who isn’t already a caregiver what that experience is like? Is it even possible without a common frame of reference? Or do you have to be in that position to really have any hope of understanding what that means?

Rayna Neises: [00:10:33] I think it’s a really tough line to walk, because, first of all, you hate to paint this horrible picture of what it’s going to look like. But the reality is, it’s not easy. There’s really nothing easy about it. And so, I think it is difficult for people to understand. Number one, majority of people just don’t even want to think about it. They don’t want to think about their parents getting older. If their parents get older, they’re getting older. And it’s just a lot. It impacts every area of your life. And so, unless you’re in the middle of it, it is difficult.

Rayna Neises: [00:11:06] But I guess my goal is to help people start thinking about it now. Because the more conversations you have with your family, your parents, whoever it is that needs you to care for them, the more you talk about what they really want, what’s important to them, the more you understand and the more you can make steps in that direction.

Mike Blake: [00:11:26] So, can you describe whether it’s from your client’s or your own perspective, or however it is you choose to approach it, what are the physical and mental tolls that becoming a caregiver takes on that person?

Rayna Neises: [00:11:45] You know, again, every situation is different, you know that. And, really, I think just watching someone age is difficult. I mean, your parents are the people who have known you your whole life. And they’ve always been there for you. And they’ve done things for you. They provided for you. They’ve been support, but they’ve also been that one that kind of shows you how to do it, who taught you to walk, who taught you to talk. You know, all of those things came from them.

Rayna Neises: [00:12:10] So, emotionally, there are so many emotions that are involved in caregiving. There’s that grief, it’s anticipatory grief is what they call it. And it’s anticipating things that are no longer going to be the same that you experienced all the time. They’re little things, like mom can’t make the same pumpkin pie that you’ve always had for Thanksgiving, because she doesn’t remember, or it’s not safe for her to cook anymore, or she’s gone.

Rayna Neises: [00:12:38] You know, my dad and I were in business together, and we found that those business meetings that he had always been – he was an accountant – where he was able to bring his expertise of people management and money management to our business together, which I was doing the hands-on running, he just got to a point where it was too confusing. There was too much for him to be able to really take the information in and problem solve with me. That was a loss. I mean, you’re losing the normal relationship that you’ve had, no matter what the situation is.

Rayna Neises: [00:13:11] And physically, there’s just a lot of stress involved, whether it be physical stress of needing to physically – you know, there were times that my dad’s blood pressure would drop and he would collapse, and physically getting him off of the floor into a safe place. Lack of sleep as a caregiver. Oftentimes, when you’re caring for someone, you’re on the alert. Just like you are when you have a young infant, you’re listening for every little thing to be able to come in. So, lack of sleep, eating habits, just all of those things can really fall to the wayside unless we’re intentional. And that’s where, you know, I feel that I can provide the most support for caregivers, is, asking them to check in, asking them to be able to really see where they are, and if they’re taking care of themselves or not.

Mike Blake: [00:13:58] So, as somebody comes to you and looks for coaching and maybe they’re in mid-caregiver mode, or maybe they realize they’re about to embark upon that responsibility, what sort of the beginner’s crash course – when you have that first conversation, how do you prepare them for the awesome responsibility that they’re considering or maybe they’re about to take on, whether considering or not or maybe they just have to? How do you prepare them for that?

Rayna Neises: [00:14:28] So, the main thing is to start with an inventory of where is your life right now. You know, when I stepped into this caregiving role of driving 220 miles one way to my dad’s home, I was teaching four-and-a-half days a week, I had a high school or at home, I had volunteer responsibilities at my church, and kids getting married. There were all kinds of things happening in our lives that are really full plates. So, adding this additional responsibility on top of what I already had really didn’t make sense.

Rayna Neises: [00:14:55] And so, for a period of time, I needed to ride out those responsibilities. But, eventually, I had to move some of those things off of my plate to really make room for caregiving and at the same time have some white space. Because if we don’t have margin in our life, we’re not going to make it. So, really having that conversation of what’s most important to you right now, and what can you let go of, and how are you going to make room in your life for this important role.

Mike Blake: [00:15:23] Now, I suspect, but I don’t know. But I suspect that also another part of this equation is that, you know, as a caregiver or as a caregiver to a new individual, if you will, I may also already have some sort of caregiving responsibilities, right? You mentioned you are a mom of a high schooler. And we know right now, for good or ill, mom, still, they really carry the meal in the household. And what sort of toll does it take on the family that, all of a sudden, has to share and is not going to get – for lack of a better term – the level of service they’re used to from somebody who now has an entirely new caregiving responsibility? And that caregiving responsibility may be more labor intensive than the one they’ve already got.

Rayna Neises: [00:16:17] Important key, you have to get everybody on board and you have to make them understand what we’re looking at. And I would say, the most important thing, the first step is to evaluate where you are and what you have room for. But the other thing is, it doesn’t mean that you have to do it all. You have got to build your team. You have to find the people to support you. So, yes, I went, but I went three days a week. And I brought people in to take care of the other three days so I could be with my family the other three days. So, I brought in help at home. I brought in someone to help clean my house. I brought in someone to clean my dad’s house.

Rayna Neises: [00:16:54] You know, just because it needs to be done, doesn’t mean you have to put your superhero cape on and do it. In fact, you need to take that super hero cape off and find people to help you. Everybody needs their sidekicks. And the more that you build into your team, the better you’re going to be, the healthier you’re going to be, and the longer you’re going to be able to sustain it.

Mike Blake: [00:17:13] I think that’s a really important point. And I want to kind of pause on that for a second, because, again, going back to the parenting model, because that’s the only one that I know in this kind of context. We’ve heard that it takes a village to raise a child. And there is at least a notion, whether or not it’s implemented all the time – again, not this podcast – that good child raising is a community responsibility. If we can, we look out for each other’s children. We try to impart a certain culture, a certain ethos, certain values system, sense of community, et cetera. And your notion that it takes a team to be a caregiver, I think is so important. Where does that team typically come from? Who are the team members?

Rayna Neises: [00:18:05] That’s a great question. I think part of what the struggle is that people assume it’s going to be family. We’re going to all just come together, and we’re all going to get along, and we’re all going to do the same thing, and we’re all going to contribute the same amount. And that is not true. It doesn’t happen. My family was very unusual. And then, I have one sister, and she and I both, we really worked together, we made a lot of sacrifices together. We did not find a lot of conflict. In fact, in my book, again, I say, we found a new relationship, a stronger relationship when we came together to care for my dad.

Rayna Neises: [00:18:38] But, typically, people find that they have these expectations that no one lives up to. And so, there’s a lot of frustration, a lot of feeling dumped on often. And that’s because they’re not looking beyond the family. Point blank, not everyone has the same natural capacity to be a caregiver as others. And so, if you find yourself being that person, great. But don’t expect everyone to be you. So, you have to look outside.

Rayna Neises: [00:19:06] So, I mentioned someone to clean my house. Yard people, I think, are part of the team. Medical people are definitely part of the team. Paid caregivers are part of that team. I believe your employer needs to be a part of that team, because they need to understand what it looks like and what your responsibilities are. The person you’re caring for needs to be a part of that team, because they need to be cooperative and they need to be helpful in that situation. As well as legal and financial professionals. I think we have to build this full capacity team to really help us to meet all of the needs.

Mike Blake: [00:19:40] And, you know, you bring up an interesting point that it doesn’t necessarily have to be family members. In fact, a lot of those team members probably won’t, right? I am qualified to mow a lawn. I’m even qualified to cook to a limited extent, as long as your standard is that it won’t kill you, but it won’t taste all that great. But, you know, I’m not qualified to provide legal advice. I don’t think I’d ever want to manage my parents money, because I have a sister. And there are all kinds of just bad things that can happen just optically when one family member sort of manages money, and that can get very ugly, as I’m sure you’ve seen or heard about.

Rayna Neises: [00:20:23] So, it’s interesting that a lot of that team may very well come from outside of the family. And, you know, I wonder if, in fact, there’s another touch point here with business that, probably some of your skills that may have led one to be successful in business, life management, time management, motivation, coaching, prioritizing resources, et cetera. You know, maybe there are skills from the business world that actually help make this more effective. What do you think about that?

Rayna Neises: [00:20:59] Definitely, 100 percent. I think the more that you realize that this is a team and that you’re managing a team, the stronger you’re going to be. You have to hire, you have to fire, you have to make sure that all of those needs are met. People are working within their strengths and that they are pulling their weight. If they aren’t, then you need to make an adjustment to that team.

Rayna Neises: [00:21:19] And I think that brought a lot of strength to our team, is, my background in business in the comfort level of interviewing, whether it be companies that we were hiring to provide help or individuals. And then, also, I think that business perspective, we aren’t successful individually. We have to have the support that we need. And even if we’re a solopreneur, we need support. And you’re smart enough to know that what’s not your strength is not where you need to be. And so, hire. It’s just like you do in the office.

Mike Blake: [00:21:54] So, one question I’m curious about is, of course, becoming a caregiver is a life changing experience – life altering experience. Not life changing. Though it could be, I guess, from a spiritual perspective. But just life altering in terms of how you’re going to live your life for some possibly indefinite period of time. How long do you find it takes people to adjust to that new reality? And I think that question is important so that people understand, maybe if they’re not perfect right away, they should cut themselves some slack. Because it seems to me this is life shift that would require some sort of breaking in period.

Rayna Neises: [00:22:40] Yeah. I think it definitely does. And it totally depends on the situation. Sometimes people have a slow, gradual step into needing to support their parents. They’re starting to see things like needing help around the yard or cleaning the gutters, those types of things. Some people, it’s a sudden stroke or an accident that suddenly demands a lot of time. And so, I think initially, like anything, we have to just respond. If it’s a crisis, we’ve got to realize it’s a crisis and we’re going to respond in that. And it’s going to take a lot of our time initially. And then, as we find that we build that team that we need to have, we bring in others and we can find more of that balance that we need in life in general to make it.

Rayna Neises: [00:23:27] So, that’s a part of life. We have to integrate caregiving. We cannot allow it to become all of our lives or we’re going to regret that. And so, you know, making sure that we’re integrating it in and we’re making our lives what we want them to be. Both honoring those that were caring for and ourselves and our other family members, I think, is a really crucial piece of that.

Rayna Neises: [00:23:49] The other part that I think oftentimes people overlook is, at the end of life, how important it is to understand this is going to be unlike any other time. It’s going to last as long as it takes. But at the same time, it’s going to take a lot out of our lives, and a lot of our time, a lot of our energy. I know at the time when I lost my mom, it was a six week process of just finally saying goodbye. And at the same time, I had a job and I had other things that I needed to do. But it’s a matter of realizing that some seasons within this caregiving are going to be more demanding than others.

Mike Blake: [00:24:31] A question I want to make sure that I get to is this, caregiving, of course, is one of the ultimate acts of service. And the thought going on in my mind is, I wonder if everybody is really cut out to be a caregiver. And what I’m really getting to is that, are there people in certain circumstances that maybe shouldn’t be a very active caregiver unless they absolutely have to? Are there certain personality profiles? Are there certain physical limitations? You know, frankly, are there people that just have a hard enough time taking care of themselves and then adding somebody else’s wellbeing is just not a good match for that person? Is that a profile or do you think that anybody can adapt with sufficient motivation and time to becoming a caregiver?

Rayna Neises: [00:25:24] I think it’s actually a really wise thing to realize that there are different personalities and there are some that are going to do and respond better than others. Again, different types of illnesses require different types of personalities, probably, or physical strength. You know, if a person is bed ridden, then obviously not everyone is physically able. Someone has a bad back, they’re not able to do some of the things that need to be done for a person who’s aging to make sure that they’re safe – the person they’re caring for is safe, successfully get them off of the floor or stop them from falling.

Rayna Neises: [00:26:02] Another piece of that I think is just, if you’re looking at someone who has dementia – which the numbers are high, that over 35 percent of the people over the age of 65 have some form of dementia – it is very trying to take care of them at times. The repeated questions, the lack of processing, they’re non-ability to understand what’s happening. You know, you really do have to be a certain type of personality to find the way to interact with them.

Rayna Neises: [00:26:37] That being said, I think that people think of caregiving as the hands-on piece only. And I think that that’s where we missed the boat a lot of times. The physical needs of the person we’re caring for are important, and definitely we want someone who’s competent and compassionate doing that. But if you are a child, you have a role in your parents life, no matter if you’re the hands-on person or not. No one can replace you as their daughter or son.

Mike Blake: [00:27:07] So, what are some tips that an individual who finds himself in that position – and you’ve hinted at it, but I’m confident that it’s a highly stressful, emotionally demanding position to be in. What are some tips that you give to people in terms of their own selfcare so that they can, frankly, hold up under that stress?

Rayna Neises: [00:27:35] It is definitely a stressful situation. And I think realizing, number one, that’s part of why I encourage people to take on the caregiver name. Because I think when we realize that we are a caregiver, we do then embrace the fact that there’s more stress in our lives than just being a daughter or son supporting an aging parent. But, you know, like anything dealing with stress, there’s definitely things to do that you need to do, get good sleep, drink plenty of water, get those exercise.

Rayna Neises: [00:28:05] But that’s where the emotional side comes in. I find that most people need to really take time to process the emotions, to grieve the losses, the changes in life, the things that will never look the same again because their parents are not able to be that same person that they were when they were younger. And really take the time to reflect. So, I say you need to be intentional with the commitments that you make and with the things that you choose to keep in your life during the season. And then, at the same time, you need to be reflective. So, each time, once a week, whatever it is, schedule time to stop and check in with yourself. How am I doing? What do I need to do differently? And a lot of times just the question, how am I doing?

Rayna Neises: [00:28:53] I might have had a really rough weekend with my dad. I might have had a time where I was not patient with him or as patient as I wanted to be. Or I might have gotten frustrated with another caregiver and the fact that they didn’t write down that something was used up in the house. And so, we didn’t have catch up when we needed it for our hotdogs, whatever it was. That frustration, that irritability, usually, when I really took the time to step back and look at it, it was because there was something else going on. Either I wasn’t getting enough rest or I was frustrated with myself and didn’t respond well.

Rayna Neises: [00:29:28] Really reflecting, and understanding those emotions, and taking the time to work through the emotions, ride through the emotions, and get the support that you need. I’m a huge advocate for support groups. I think that they can bring a lot of encouragement and normalcy to your life in that season. And so, really finding the support that you need, whatever that looks like, if it’s a coach or support group, counselor, making sure that you’re caring for yourself in that way.

Mike Blake: [00:29:55] So, you mentioned the emotional toll – and maybe I’m putting words in your mouth – but it sounds like it can be something of a roller coaster.

Rayna Neises: [00:30:03] Definitely.

Mike Blake: [00:30:05] I’d like to talk about one emotion in particular, and that is, at the end of that season. All caregiving stints are going to end one way or the other. And I have some thirdhand experience with this because I’ve been involved as a volunteer with Lou Gehrig’s disease advocacy groups. And of course, that’s basically Alzheimer’s of the body.

Mike Blake: [00:30:32] And, you know, something that I’ve heard from caregivers in that scenario is, the most difficult or one of the most difficult emotions that those caregivers have to address or confront is their sense of relief and the guilt that they face around that relief. That, yes, they’re sad that their loved one has died and they miss that person terribly. But on the other hand, suddenly their obligation, a massive obligation, has ended and they can resume their lives. So, their lives have become significantly unburdeneAll right. And, again, thirdhand, I’ve heard that, that in itself can be a different kind of trauma, if you will. Have you heard or experienced something similar? And if so, how do people kind of deal with and work through that?

Rayna Neises: [00:31:29] I think that that’s a normal piece of grief. And society today, I don’t think we really acknowledge grief or understand grief. We think of it as these stages and steps. And really, that’s not what it is. It’s those steps, those stages, that we hear about are pieces of the grief. But they can happen simultaneously. You can move forward. You can move backwards. You dance within the grief throughout the season.

Rayna Neises: [00:31:56] So, I think definitely it is unsettling when you have spent so much of your time and so much of your energy focused in on one person or one activity. And especially by the point in time when you lose that person, because like I mentioned earlier, it’s one of those things that that amount of time, that commitment, is going to increase at the end of your loved one’s life. It just is. And so, that’s something that you have spent a great deal of time with them there at the end. And then, suddenly, like you said, they’re gone.

Rayna Neises: [00:32:33] For me, personally, I called it an untethering. The best description I had was, my dad was my last parent. He was kind of my always come back to home place and then he was gone, and that was very difficult. I did not expect grief to be as overwhelming for me as it was. I knew that I agreed throughout my season. I knew that it was coming. I mean, we’re taking care of someone with a terminal illness, but it is still surprising when you reach the end. And at the same time, I think it can be very unsettling.

Rayna Neises: [00:33:15] I called it grief brain. I found myself not being able to accomplish tasks that I had accomplished in the same period of time. Sometimes it took twice as long. It was exhausting. I found myself tired when I didn’t do anything. And so, it was a long period of time that I was thankful I had counsel to just rest, and to allow it to be what it was, and to be in the grief, and not to try to push through it or to try to ignore it.

Rayna Neises: [00:33:45] So, I think for everybody, it’s different. Like, all emotions, I think, it definitely is a time where it’s surprising. And, for me, honestly, that’s where the name of my book came from. As I looked back, I didn’t regret what I did. I didn’t regret investing as much of my time and energy in my dad, and building the memories, and having the opportunities of the joy that we experienced during that four-and-a-half years that I spent with him. I was able to look back and say, “I don’t regret any of those things that I did.”

Rayna Neises: [00:34:15] And, for me, taking that experience and pivoting with my business was part of what helped me move forward. So, I think it’s important to find what you can take from that time. And, for me, it was important for me to give to others and that really helped to move me forward and out of that grief.

Mike Blake: [00:34:37] And I wonder also if one is in that position for, you know, years, that that becomes part of your identity as well. And part of your identity is passing away right along with the relative.

Rayna Neises: [00:34:55] Definitely.

Mike Blake: [00:34:55] And, again, I’m being amateur psychologist here. But that does sound like that would be jarring.

Rayna Neises: [00:35:03] And I think that’s part of why I think it’s so important to teach people, just like anything else, just like workaholism, all of those things can become extreme. Even as a caregiver, if that is all that you have in your life, you’re going to find yourself even more in a depth of depression and struggling with how to go forward. If you maintain a healthy life with caring, being integrated into part of it, then you’re going to find yourself having a marriage to walk back into, having a relationship with your children and other friends. You know, those things are still there. If you neglect them for the entire time that you’re in a caregiving season, you’re going to find that they aren’t there and you’re going to be, you know, in a lot worse shape.

Mike Blake: [00:35:49] We’re talking to Rayna Neises. And the topic is, Should I become a caregiver? I want to switch gears a little bit to talk a little bit more directly about managing the professional side of one’s life in this kind of scenario, the caregiver scenario. And one question I’d like to cover is, if you have an employer, how do you approach that conversation with an employer about being a caregiver? And I guess giving them a heads up that this is going on and you just want to make your employer aware of it. How do you approach that? And what do you hope to achieve with your employer by having that conversation?

Rayna Neises: [00:36:36] So, in my employee/employer situations, I think I’ve been as a teacher and then, also, working in other industries that just having that personal relationship with my boss. So, I just made sure that I made an appointment, went in and just said, “This is where we’re at. My mom is progressing in her disease. We’ve reached a point where we think we’re going to lose her. I just want you to be aware that we’re probably talking within weeks that she’s going to pass away. And remind me again the policy of how long I can be gone and those kinds of questions.”

Rayna Neises: [00:37:11] If you’re not at the end, then I think just letting them know that this is something that’s going on in my personal life, and that I have the support that I need to be able to continue to do what I need to do here at work. But I do want you to know there might be emergencies that come up here or there and that I’ll do the best I can to juggle as I need to.

Rayna Neises: [00:37:31] But I think knowing that you have family leave time or a leave time to be able to take those loved ones to the doctor’s appointments or do those things that you need to do, it’s important to be communicating that those are going to be needed. At the same time, I think as an employee, it’s really important to honor your responsibilities and make sure that you have the support that you need to be able to continue to do the best you can at your work.

Rayna Neises: [00:37:56] And, also, to deal with your emotional needs. You know, just because you’re in this season doesn’t mean it’s okay to not be healthy. So, if you need to get the support of a counselor or other people in that way, too, I think that’s important. Because your job, they need you to perform the best that you can at that point.

Mike Blake: [00:38:15] So, on the other side of the coin, how can employers be supportive of caregivers – assuming this is desired – so that they can remain employed by the company and still deliver the value or at least most of the value that they have been delivering?

Rayna Neises: [00:38:31] I think at this time with COVID, we’ve learned that working from home actually can have a good productivity. And so, being flexible and open to options that are available for your employee, I think, is an important piece of that. Realizing that emergencies are going to creep up. And just like you have a new mom who has a tendency to have a sick child and need to be at home more than a person who’s in this season of their life is probably going to find themselves needing to go to doctor’s appointments, needing to take off at last minute a little bit more than they probably did before they took on this role.

Rayna Neises: [00:39:08] So, I think there’s just an understanding of them being willing. They are trying to do the best that they can and not feeling like they’re using that as an excuse. But rather being supportive and that helping to problem solve, being flexible with their schedule as far as allowing them to come in and make up hours or stay late on another day if they need to leave for a doctor’s appointment, those types of things. I think just even as the boss asking the question “How’s mom doing?” can really help that employee feel appreciated, understood, and just build that loyalty even more.

Mike Blake: [00:39:43] Rayna, this has been a great conversation. We could go so much more in depth, but probably the best thing to do is to refer people to your book. You certainly can learn a lot of lessons from that, I’m sure. But aside from that, if people have questions we haven’t addressed or if there’s something they’d like to go into more depth than we were able to today, can they reach out to you? And if so, what’s the best way to contact you for more information?

Rayna Neises: [00:40:06] Definitely. So, my website is aseasonofcaring.com. And there’s a contact form on there, you can make a time to schedule a time to talk. I would be more than happy to answer any questions to try to support people in any way that I can. You can also find out more about the book at noregrets-book.com. And there’s some preorder offers available here for the next month or so. And then, you can just find it at all major retailers after June 1st.

Mike Blake: [00:40:34] Well, that’s going to wrap it up for today’s program. I’d like to thank Rayna Neises so much for joining us and sharing her expertise with us.

Mike Blake: [00:40:41] We’ll be exploring a new topic each week, so please tune in so that when you’re faced with your next business decision, you have clear vision when making it. If you enjoy these podcasts, please consider leaving a review with your favorite podcast aggregator. It helps people find us that we can help them. If you like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. Once again, this is Mike Blake. Our sponsor is Brady Ware & Company. And this has been the Decision Vision podcast.

 

Tagged With: A Season of Caring, Brady Ware, Brady Ware & Company, Caregivers, caregiving, elder care, Michael Blake, Mike Blake, No Regrets, Rayna Neises

Decision Vision Episode 114: Should I Let My Children Take Over the Business? – An Interview with David Ray and Matthew DiCicco of Eubel, Brady & Suttman

April 29, 2021 by John Ray

Eubel, Brady & Suttman
Decision Vision
Decision Vision Episode 114: Should I Let My Children Take Over the Business? - An Interview with David Ray and Matthew DiCicco of Eubel, Brady & Suttman
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Eubel, Brady & Suttman

Decision Vision Episode 114:  Should I Let My Children Take Over the Business? – An Interview with David Ray and Matthew DiCicco of Eubel, Brady & Suttman

Only one in nine businesses make it to the third generation of family ownership. David Ray and Matthew DiCicco of Eubel, Brady & Suttman joined Mike Blake to cover some of the financial and psychological issues of transferring a business to the next generation, and the factors which go into that decision. “Decision Vision” is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

Eubel, Brady & Suttman Investment and Wealth Management

Eubel Brady & Suttman was formed when three friends came together as business partners more than two and a half decades ago. From the very beginning, a high value has been placed on trust, friendships, caring for clients, long-term investment results and a single value-oriented investment philosophy focused on absolute rather than relative returns. EBS clients are business partners and often become friends. They strive to communicate accordingly – being as transparent as possible. For EBS, Investing in You is about taking the time to learn what is important to every client, those they care about and how the firm’s investment and wealth management processes might provide them peace of mind.

Company website

David Ray, Chief Operating Officer, Eubel, Brady & Suttman

Eubel, Brady & Suttman
David Ray, Chief Operating Officer, Eubel, Brady & Suttman
David is responsible for the day-to-day business operations for the firm. He is also a member of the Consulting Services Group where he works with individual clients and business owners. David has 38 years of corporate management experience. Prior to joining EBS in 2003, he worked in various financial and management capacities at The Berry Company and as Chief Financial Officer of AcuSport Corporation. David holds a B.S. degree in Accounting from Wright State University in Dayton, Ohio and an M.B.A. from the University of Dayton in Dayton, Ohio.

 

Matthew DiCicco, Senior Vice President of Consulting Services & General Counsel, Eubel, Brady & Suttman

Matthew DiCicco, Senior VP Wealth Management / General Counsel

Matt is responsible for developing long-term relationships with high net worth individuals and business owners, and serving as the firm’s general counsel. He takes a collaborative approach and applies the experience gained through his prior law practice to help clients address their unique circumstances. Prior to joining EBS in 2016, Matt practiced law in the private sector for more than 15 years. He holds a B.A. degree in Psychology from Gannon University in Erie, Pennsylvania and a J.D. from the University of Dayton in Dayton, Ohio.

 

Mike Blake, Brady Ware & Company

Mike Blake, Host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series

Michael Blake is the host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series and a Director of Brady Ware & Company. Mike specializes in the valuation of intellectual property-driven firms, such as software firms, aerospace firms, and professional services firms, most frequently in the capacity as a transaction advisor, helping clients obtain great outcomes from complex transaction opportunities. He is also a specialist in the appraisal of intellectual properties as stand-alone assets, such as software, trade secrets, and patents.

Mike has been a full-time business appraiser for 13 years with public accounting firms, boutique business appraisal firms, and an owner of his own firm. Prior to that, he spent 8 years in venture capital and investment banking, including transactions in the U.S., Israel, Russia, Ukraine, and Belarus.

Brady Ware & Company

Brady Ware & Company is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm which helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality. Brady Ware services clients nationally from its offices in Alpharetta, GA; Columbus and Dayton, OH; and Richmond, IN. The firm is growth-minded, committed to the regions in which they operate, and most importantly, they make significant investments in their people and service offerings to meet the changing financial needs of those they are privileged to serve. The firm is dedicated to providing results that make a difference for its clients.

Decision Vision Podcast Series

“Decision Vision” is a podcast covering topics and issues facing small business owners and connecting them with solutions from leading experts. This series is presented by Brady Ware & Company. If you are a decision-maker for a small business, we’d love to hear from you. Contact us at decisionvision@bradyware.com and make sure to listen to every Thursday to the “Decision Vision” podcast.

Past episodes of “Decision Vision” can be found at decisionvisionpodcast.com. “Decision Vision” is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX®.

Connect with Brady Ware & Company:

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:02] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast series focusing on critical business decisions. Brought to you by Brady Ware & Company. Brady Ware is a regional full service accounting and advisory firm that helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality.

Mike Blake: [00:00:21] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast giving you, the listener, clear vision to make great decisions. In each episode, we discuss the process of decision making on a different topic from the business owners’ or executives’ perspective. We aren’t necessarily telling you what to do, but we can put you in a position to make an informed decision on your own and understand when you might need help along the way.

Mike Blake: [00:00:41] My name is Mike Blake, and I’m your host for today’s program. I’m a director at Brady Ware & Company, a full service accounting firm based in Dayton, Ohio, with offices in Dayton; Columbus, Ohio; Richmond, Indiana; and Alpharetta, Georgia. Brady Ware is sponsoring this podcast, which is being recorded in Atlanta per social distancing protocols. If you would like to engage with me on social media and my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself, and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. If you like this podcast, please subscribe on your favorite podcast aggregator, and please consider leaving a review of the podcast as well.

Mike Blake: [00:01:15] So, today’s topic is, Should I let my children or family take over the business? And, you know, this is not a topic that people run into every day, but it is a topic that has a lot of depth to it. And most of us, if we’re not in a family business, we probably know somebody that is. And it might be a business that’s been in the family for one generation, it might be a business that’s been in the family for many generations. And, interestingly, on a side note, some of the businesses with the most longevity are insurance businesses, interestingly enough.

Mike Blake: [00:01:50] And I wonder if the fact that they have this actuarial model somehow enables them to manage risk over the long term, maybe, than other firms. But it is a fascinating topic. And I think given the way that our economy is shaping capital gains, tax changes, notwithstanding, that family businesses are going to become an increasingly important asset. You know, we live in a time of great uncertainty and there’s a lot of literature now coming out of both The Wall Street Journal and The Economist that, you know, for the time being, the notion of this risk-free rate of return of a five percent that most of us have grown up with counting on is really not in the cards.

Mike Blake: [00:02:37] People who are millennials or And Gen Xers may be fortunate to have a risk- free rate of return of two to three percent, frankly, and there are a lot of factors going into that. But I’m not going to discuss it in this particular program. But, you know, a family business is potentially a tremendous asset for wealth building, for legacy building, for taking care of one’s children or not. Warren Buffett’s been very clear, he’s not going to leave a whole lot of money to his children. Bill Gates is sort of the same way. But everybody approaches this differently.

Mike Blake: [00:03:16] And intergenerational businesses do sort of take on a life of their own. I have a few clients like that where I’ve helped them write their family business charter, the family charter, which is sort of like the constitution of how are you going to govern these things. And there are businesses that are multigenerational family businesses that are names that you may not have realized. Kikkoman, the soy sauce maker in Japan, is a business that traces back to a group of eight families that are still in ownership today, back in the 17th century. The Rothschilds date back to the 18th century back in Bavaria. Something closer to home, you know, the Fords are on their fourth generation. And the Mellon’s are in something like their sixth or seventh generation. So, you know, they are around and they may not be as visible, but they’re around.

Mike Blake: [00:04:09] So, I hope you’ll find this a very interesting topic, even if it doesn’t necessarily apply to your particular situation. Or maybe you’ll decide you want to make it a situation. If you’re just starting out with your business, maybe this will inspire you to create an asset that can be valuable to future generations to come.

Mike Blake: [00:04:28] And joining us today are David Ray and Matt DiCicco of Eubel Brady & Suttman. With over 40 years of corporate management experience, David has successfully held multiple positions within the C-Suite prior to joining EBS in 2003. Today, David is responsible for the day-to-day business operations of EBS. As a member of the Wealth Management Group, David works closely with high net worth individuals and brings the ability to assist clients with the preservation and growth of a closely held family business. David also brings a unique talent through his study of behavioral assessment and talent optimization. Using behavioral analysis, David helps business owners and clients define and develop an ideal state definition for their personal business and financial future.

Mike Blake: [00:05:12] Matt joined EBS in 2016 after practicing law in the private sector for over 15 years. Today, Matt applies his experience to serve high net worth individuals and business owner clients as a member of the Wealth Management Group of EBS. Whether a client has a family member going through divorce, a probate question, or an issue burdening their business, Matt is the legal resource to provide direction. Utilizing a proactive approach, Matt helps clients prepare for the positive and negative life issues that may impact their portfolio. Matt is also responsible for managing the legal risk within EBS’s private investments.

Mike Blake: [00:05:45] Eubel Brady & Suttman was formed when three friends came together as business partners more than two-and-a-half decades ago. From the very beginning, a high value has been placed on trust, friendships, caring for clients, long term investment results, and a single value oriented investment philosophy focused on absolute rather than relative returns. EBS’s clients are business partners and often become friends. They strive to communicate accordingly being as transparent as possible. For EBS investing in you is about taking the time to learn what is important to you, those you care about, and how the firm’s investment and wealth management processes might provide you peace of mind. David and Matt, welcome to the program.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:06:23] Thank you.

David Ray: [00:06:24] Thank you very much, Mike.

Mike Blake: [00:06:26] So, I read a statistic that indicates that something on the order of eight out of ten family businesses have no succession plan whatsoever. Do you think that’s an accurate statistic? And if so, why do you think that number is so high? And this seems high to me.

David Ray: [00:06:46] Mike, I think, one of the challenges we’ve got with answering that question is, succession, if you say you have a succession plan, I think means a lot of different things to different people. And in our experience, we would view succession plan and having one in place as having a number of elements. It would include, for example, the management succession, the depth of your bench. It would include estate and tax strategies. It would include how are you going to work with families, something you alluded to in your opening comments, kind of what is the philosophy of the family around the business, and the role of active shareholders as well as those that aren’t involved in the business.

David Ray: [00:07:33] And then, ultimately, what’s the vision for the company down the road, whether it be sold or transferred or whatever that might be. So, it’s a pretty all encompassing definition in terms of the way we look at it. And, frankly, it’s not something as a to-do item. We look at it as kind of an ongoing item that’s key in governing the business correctly.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:07:58] And, Mike, I might add to that and say, when you referenced no succession plan, I think that that implies that they have no plan at all in place. I think that most business owners have some idea of what they want to do with the business some day, some conceptual idea. Now, that conceptual idea may very well change as they become educated about their options and consequences of the different strategies they wish to employ. But I think that that statistic is high. I think that most people do have some conceptual idea of what they want to do with the business.

Mike Blake: [00:08:32] So, I want to share an observation with you, you know, it seemed to me that back in the first decade of this century, I think there are a lot of predictions that somewhere around 2010, 2011, that a lot of family businesses were going to turn over. That people simply were going to have to sell their businesses. And I think investment bankers, in particular, were kind of licking their chops saying, “Oh, boy. We’re going to have the best years ever selling all of these family businesses.” And, you know, I’m not sure that that’s necessarily happened. I think that baby boomers are hanging in their businesses longer than a lot of people would have predicted. Do you agree? Do you have a similar observation? And if so, what do you think is driving that?

David Ray: [00:09:20] I would say that that’s probably correct. We were exposed in some previous presentations to a number of over 15 million private businesses and about two-thirds of those are controlled by baby boomers, Michael. And I think, frankly, one of the things that we’ve seen with many of our business owner clients is, frankly, they’d like to be farther along than they are.

David Ray: [00:09:48] However, in many cases, for you to take on some of these succession issues related, for example, to developing your management team and your bench strength, it is the equivalent of adding a part time job. And most of the business owners I know are operating the business day-to-day, frankly, are working way more than 40 hours anyway. And so, when you look at the possibility of adding on to a part time job, that’s just something that’s not practical for them to do both. I think that’s one big issue.

David Ray: [00:10:20] And I think the other one is that, people, in some cases, get so much out of running the business and are so excited about it. That’s one of those things that’s easy to procrastinate, until there’s some kind of event where you really have to act. And we see that in many cases where you have fewer options, in fact, because of the whole situation or whatever it might be becomes a reality.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:10:47] Yeah. I may speak more to really what’s driving this. And, you know, one thing I would say is, medical advancements or living longer or healthier, valuations are high right now, so, frankly, it limits the buyer pool. And then, you know, when things are good, when you’re feeling good – pre-COVID – the business is throwing off cash, valuations in the market – I think you referred to, you know, a two to three percent risk-free rate of return – when you get a whole bunch of money for your business, now, you have to figure out what you’re going to do with that money. And there’s not a lot of good options.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:11:26] So, when you’re doing good and you’re feeling good and your business is throwing off cash, it tends to lead to procrastination. And then, you can look at all the reasons why people procrastinate in the formulation of a formal strategic plan and the implementation of a formal strategic plan. And there’s lots of reasons, right? You know, one of those is tough decisions have to be made. You’re making decisions about your baby. For some people, their lifetime of work and achievement that they almost view as being a reflection of themselves, a piece of themselves. And, you know, when you have family members involved in the business, it requires tough decisions to be made with regard to those family members.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:12:11] And then, finally, there’s finality. When you make that decision, you formulate that formal plan, you begin to implement that plan, and changes start to be made. That is a real life changing moment for some people.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:12:27] So, Mike, one of the things that the David and I work together on is utilizing what — and then that succession blueprint. We’re helping business owners proactively define what a successful transition would look like for them. And in doing that, we’ll provide insight into their own behavior and the consequences of their behavior can have on planning the transition. As well as just identifying priorities, identifying the marketability of the business, what can make it more or less valuable. As well as providing some different ranges of valuations on a roughly right type of basis.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:13:08] And helping them using one of our proprietary models identify what that retirement is going to look like and what this hypothetical pot of money is going to do for them based upon their own anticipated needs. And sometimes just providing a lot of education and peace of mind can help them get over that procrastination stumbling block and start making decisions whereby they can transfer to the next generation.

Mike Blake: [00:13:36] So, I think I’m going to want to come back to that succession blueprint. But before I do, you said something at the outset of that answer that I think I’m going to make up a new word, just subtle smart. And because of that, I want to come back because I think it’s so important and it’s easy to miss. And that is that, when you sell a business, you suddenly become an investor, especially if most of your investable assets have been locked into the business. And I think something that gets missed – and I advise my clients on too – is, when you sell your business, ostensibly, you have this big pile of cash. You now need to do something with or should do something with. And is it going to generate as high a return on a risk adjusted basis as what you are already doing?

Mike Blake: [00:14:24] And trying to map that puzzle is not as easy as it sounds. And on this I’d love you to comment, a market like what we have today, I think is actually a double edged sword. Because on one hand that may allow you to sell your business for an attractive valuation. But on the other hand, when you have a market that might be at the top – and I’m not going to I’m not going to offer hard or fast comment. I’m not a RIAA. I’m unlicensed – but if you are at a high point in the market, what kind of returns are you going to get at that particular point in time? It’s just how high can these things go in the short term?

Mike Blake: [00:15:06] And, you know, that’s a subtle question that you have to think about. And maybe that may lend to a decision to keep the business in the family simply because of a market timing issue. Every CFA in the world is just about to point a gun at my head. I’m not advocating market timing. But if you have a market environment where returns are hard to come by, I do think it’s only prudent to look at that environment when you sell your business into it. I took much more time asking that question than I should have, but I love you to react to it.

David Ray: [00:15:45] So, it’s funny, because Ronny, one of our founding partners, talks about this issue a lot with business owners and with us internally. And you’re exactly right, Michael, and I’ll use an example. I think I’ll use an example, if you had bought Cisco Systems and you really liked the company in 1999. And 20 years from then, you plan to retire. Actually, when you liquidated that 20 years later, you would have had a pretty substantial double digit loss. And it’s because Cisco sold at a very high price.

David Ray: [00:16:21] And one of the things that generally is the case is, private markets and valuations you get in sales in the privates tend to follow the public markets. And, therefore, to your point, if valuations are high and you’re getting a good number on a sale to have a private business, it’s very important that you go in with both eyes wide open from a preservation of capital standpoint. Because the last thing you really want to have somebody do is to go through and to work their tail off and then, all of a sudden, reinvest and have losses that are significant. So, I think that’s something as we work with clients, we really try to manage expectations when prices are very high in terms of that reinvestment strategy.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:17:06] Yeah. And what I would say in addition to that is, we work very hard to minimize the risk of a permanent loss of capital. So, you liquidated your business for a good number. We’re going to employ several different strategies to try to minimize any risk of you throwing it into an investment now at a high number that may ultimately come down. It may not recover by the time you’re ready to use this asset. So, that could be a whole another podcast on the different strategies [inaudible], but we do employ them.

Mike Blake: [00:17:37] So, a concern I hear – and you touched on a little bit, but I’d love you to expand upon it – frequently in transferring a business within the family is the risk of creating family strife. And for good or ill, I make a lot of money on adjudicating, in effect, or refereeing those family strife kind of issues. And I’m curious, is that a consideration that you see frequently? Is that a realistic fear? And if so, what are some tips you can provide to manage it or even assess if that family strife even is manageable?

David Ray: [00:18:12] Well, to answer your question, we see it a lot particularly in situations where you have some family members who are active in the business, may have a managerial role, but may have an employee role, whatever it might be. And then, you also have other folks who live off the dividends, let’s say, of the cash flow of the business. And particularly at times when the owners and operators of the business may be looking at long term issues, and that may, for example, behoove the business to defer dividends, for example, that’s going to create some strife. But there’s also personality related issues that we see that create strife. There’s extreme examples that we’ve seen where a judge had to even intervene. And for board meetings have representation for kind of a divided family here in a business not too far from us. So, this is a huge issue.

David Ray: [00:19:10] But I think the one lesson that we see and we think is really important is, yes, there’s going to be strife. But if you don’t deal with that strife proactively, the strife down the road can be much more painful. And so, one of the things that we try to do is to kind of work with folks, give them behavioral insights on things that may help them understand why someone may be looking at the same situation differently than they do. And try to, in some cases, even encourage conversations and have kind of whiteboard sessions to really get to the bottom of these issues so that there can be a continuity in terms of how these things are addressed.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:19:54] And I think David and I could both spat off a bunch of examples. As, Mike, I’m sure you could as well, of the various causes for family strife. There’s lots of different things that that can cause it. But, you know, frankly, in terms of managing it, some of the more effective things that I’ve seen have just been where you have a strong family member, business owner-member, who’s willing to set expectations of the next generation early on.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:20:21] And then, secondly, have the confidence and the courage to put the right person in the right seat. And that’s not always the easiest thing to do. But, you know, frankly, managing and promoting your kids as you would any other employee, having defined job descriptions and duties, having performance reviews and those types of things, I think, can be helpful.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:20:42] But then, also, actually one unique thing that David and I have seen is a family business, multigenerational, where all of the kids in the next generation were required to complete college, and work outside of the family business for a period of years before they were even eligible to work in the family business. And by that point, some of the folks decided, “I’m not that interested anymore. I found what I like over here.” And for the ones that did come back, they now have real world perspective. They’ve had to work for somebody. They’ve had to answer to somebody that’s not mom or dad, or grandma, grandpa, or whoever else is there.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:21:19] You know, I can tell you, I think it’s exceptionally valuable. And that I have some investments and businesses of my own and I’ve fired my own son. And, you know, it’s a tough thing to do, but sometimes it’s the right thing to do and it certainly provides an education.

Mike Blake: [00:21:37] Well, you know, you talked about a future podcast topic, firing your own son, that’s about as real and raw as it gets.

David Ray: [00:21:45] Mike, my first business – as a side – I fired the guy who became my best man later in my wedding. So, yeah, we’ve got a whole topic opportunity there.

Mike Blake: [00:21:56] Well, boy. We’ll have you back. So, to me – and this is a an uneducated view – it seems like keeping the business seems like almost kind of a natural thing to do. It seems, at least on the surface, you don’t have to go find a buyer, for example. You know, at some point, you let somebody take over the family business. We’ve talked about the complexities in doing that. But at a very high level, that just sort of seems like the path of least resistance. In your experience, do you think that more business owners than not actually take that path? Or do more of them tend to gravitate towards some sort of external exit?

David Ray: [00:22:36] The statistics would show – and we’ve seen a couple of independent studies on this, and I’ll quickly reference one – that you take nine businesses, four tend to vanish before they get through a second generation, two are sold, three get to the second generation, but only one of those get to a third generation. So, the statistics would suggest that it’s a tough road. And I think Matt kind of alluded to this previously, but I think the more professional the management approach is, probably, the greater chance that you have to pass the business through generations in an orderly manner and continue to grow the business in value.

David Ray: [00:23:17] And, you know, we use EOS as a governance management system at our company, you know, there’s a bunch of successful ones. But in our experience and in doing some of these companies, the disciplines that they have in place, which you can pick up on pretty quick just kind of spending time with managers or touring facilities, they’re kind of the key to the ability to keep things thriving.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:23:47] Yeah. I would add that, you know, I think a lot of it depends on the type of business and then also what’s important to the owner and to the family. You know, is this a business that started as a family business, like a family restaurant or a family nursery or something like that? And other people, frankly, they are just serial entrepreneurs, right? They can’t wait to stand up the next idea, and grow it, and sell it, and amass generational wealth by building and selling companies over the course of their career. So, I mean, I would say that it’s a little bit specific.

Mike Blake: [00:24:22] So, you know, that phenomenon you just brought up segues, I think, nicely into a question. Is that, there’s a phenomenon out there called shirtsleeves to shirtsleeves. And the the notion there is that, if wealth is built in one generation, usually around a family business, that it’s typically gone by the third generation. And that might almost seem to argue against trying to keep the business in the family, because, statistically speaking, the subsequent generation just may not be equipped either emotionally, skill set, or otherwise to take on that responsibility. Would you agree with that? I mean, it sounds like at least the statistics bear that out. If only one in nine of those companies ever make it to the third generation or less than that. But what do you think about that?

David Ray: [00:25:13] You know, I think it goes back to Matt’s point, I think it is kind of facts and circumstances. I could cite an example where the first company I was in made it very successfully to the third generation. There was a sale that the third generation key person stayed on. But, frankly, chose of his own accord to leave, frankly, because of some differences of opinion and he wasn’t used to reporting to somebody. I think that’s a key part of it.

David Ray: [00:25:42] But it depends probably, Michael, more than anything else about how valuable that business is. Because you’ve got a really valuable business that is being run effectively by the family, then it’s easy to keep going. But if you can start to see the wheels slow down, the other family members who are owners, and there’s just not the level of professional management that needs to kind of take to the next generation. If you don’t do something, like trying to sell, for example, or at least take some money out, then all you’re doing is seeing that golden goose kind of a road.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:26:18] Yeah. And I’ll really be interested to see how that statistic may change with the advent of the technological advances that we have of late. Because I can think of several examples where there is a multigenerational family business that everybody has done very well. And then, you have the younger generation come in and utilize this thing called the Internet and they explode it. And, you know, it wouldn’t surprise me if you see a lot more of the younger generations coming in and taking a good, strong family business, and scaling it through technology.

Mike Blake: [00:26:53] That is a fascinating and a very compelling statement, and I haven’t given any thought to that. But, I mean, it makes sense to me – it’s also hard to put this into words. The fact of the matter is that we’re all surrounded by technology, right? Many of us maybe more than we want to. And it’s not like growing up around a car company or a candy company where you don’t just build cars or make candy over the course of your normal life, but you certainly interact with technology over the course of your normal life. Right? And that could provide sort of an environment for companies in that industry, at least, or families whose companies are in that industry to sort of have a head start in terms of the mentality about technology and how it changes. And don’t get too comfortable in so many of the other rules that make technology businesses different.

David Ray: [00:27:53] And I think to Matt’s point, if you look at some of these companies that have had in the past but have basically been forced into embracing e-commerce, and if they’ve got the right firepower behind them, they, in some cases, are experiencing very explosive growth on that segment of their business.

Mike Blake: [00:28:18] So, you know, not everybody is built to run a business necessarily. Have you encountered scenarios in which a business, maybe an owner really wanted to pass their business on to children or at least a family member. But to your mind, they weren’t really qualified. And maybe the children themselves said, “I don’t want to do this. I’ll run this into the ground. Just sell it.” What’s your advice in those circumstances? Do you just sort of then ride that out? Or do you try to be proactive in trying to get family members interested and skilled to run the business? What, in your mind, is best practices in that kind of scenario?

David Ray: [00:29:04] Well, on this behavioral side that you touched on, that’s something that we’re fascinated by and have learned a lot from. And I learned a lot from a guy named Michael Bole, who we still use, frankly, to talk to some of our business owner clients about this very issue, Michael. And I will tell you that, often without someone knowing it, they may take that next generation and kind of force them into a role that, frankly, does not give them satisfaction. They may have the confidence to do it. But, frankly, over time, they don’t get much satisfaction out of it.

David Ray: [00:29:46] And that can be something that leads to an erosion of value of business. Not to speak of, you might be contributing to that child not having as happy a life as they deserve and should have. And we’ve seen that. For example, if you get a really extroverted individual who ran the business, was great at creating relationships, and drove sales through that relationship building. And all of a sudden, you’ve got somebody that comes along that’s much more operational oriented and you try to put them in that role. We’ve seen that kind of scenario. And it’s important to kind of recognize that not just is the competence there and the desire, but is there a fit from the standpoint of a behavioral match on success for that type of job?

Matthew DiCicco: [00:30:34] Yeah. And that’s part of that succession blueprint. Some of the tools that we can offer to assess multiple factors, such as the aptitude, the competence, desire, and interest. And there’s more to the decision of finding the right person for the right seat than just who you were born to, right? So, I mean, if you’re really looking for the overall right person to move the business forward, sometimes that’s going to result in decisions that, you know, might not be the best for the family, but it’s best for business versus the opposite.

David Ray: [00:31:12] And, Mike, obviously, I think maybe one of the trickiest combinations is that, you’ve got a child who really desires to be a part of the business and take it over. But, frankly, just the aptitude or the ability to embrace what’s necessary just isn’t there. And that can create for some significant family challenges that are very apparent to the employees. Probably the employee knows better than anybody that that kid is capable of running the business.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:31:43] Yeah. And that child may have a role. It may not be in the role of –

David Ray: [00:31:47] A leader.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:31:48] Right. Exactly.

Mike Blake: [00:31:50] And at least not right away, right? I mean, the beauty of a family business, I do think the time horizons are expanded. And I think, in fact, there’s data out there that suggests that family businesses tend to outperform their non-family counterparts. I think one of the things that drives that is the fact that they tend not to make snap decisions. They tend to really kind of take their time. And, frankly, they have a longer investment time horizon, too, because they’re generally not wired to a quarter to quarter basis.

Mike Blake: [00:32:22] So, in that scenario that you described with a child that would like to take over the business, in a family scenario, I imagine that means the conversation isn’t necessarily know, but just simply not yet. Whereas, in a more “professionalized environment,” for lack of a better term, it’s more like up and out. You’re not going to give me the opportunity that I’m out.

David Ray: [00:32:44] Yes.

Mike Blake: [00:32:46] And so, I want to switch gears here. I want to talk a little bit about valuation, because that’s near and dear to my heart. And I think one of the trickiest things about a family business and one of the drivers of the decision, of course, is, what is the value of the business and what is its value to a third party buyer versus the value to the business.

Mike Blake: [00:33:16] And an observation I hear frequently, particularly from investment bankers and private equity folks is, “I couldn’t sell that business” or “I couldn’t buy that business because the seller was simply irrational.” And I kind of wonder about that because I wonder if maybe they’re irrational because the seller isn’t a private equity group. They’re not an investment banker. But I kind of wonder if sometimes the business can just simply be worth more to the current owner than it is to anybody else. And that doesn’t make anybody’s fault. That’s just kind of how the numbers kind of work and how the values kind of work. What do you think about that? Am I crazy? Do I have three heads for saying that? Or do you think there’s a grain of truth in that notion?

David Ray: [00:34:04] I think that I would tend to agree with you. And particularly, if you don’t just measure in purely an economic sense, there’s a lot of things we’ve seen that are run through the business that enhance the quality of life that by themselves can make the business more valuable to that owner. That is a significant issue that we see that can really enhance lifestyle that you would lose if you sold the business. So, I think you’re exactly right on that one.

David Ray: [00:34:43] In fact, Matt and I were talking about this in preparation. And I was telling him, all the folks I’ve sat down with that have never sold their business, I’ve only seen one that really had some internal resources that had their arms around what the business was really worth to a sophisticated buyer. And so, there really is two different notions about what a business is worth. And I think it’s really hard to keep it purely economic because of legacy issues, and lifestyle, and other things that that business owner enjoys along with the economics.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:35:21] Yeah. And, you know, we typically come across situations like that. Oftentimes, it has been brought about by locker room talk or golf course talk or cocktail party talk where, you know, they hear so-and-so got a certain EBITDA multiple for their business or, you know, Sally’s Machine Shop sold for, you know, whatever down the street. And so, therefore, my business must be worth at least that. And those situations really require education, Mike.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:35:52] And that’s where this business marketability element of that succession blueprint comes in, where, you know, we look at the different factors that impact multiples and valuation such as the type of the business, the health of the business. You know, they have a ton of revenue, but it’s concentrated in one or two customers or they don’t have recurring revenue. Every single dollar is a unique customer in a single transaction. They don’t have a moat. They don’t have any real competitive advantage. They don’t have a stable management team. I mean, you can think of all the different reasons that impact valuation.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:36:29] And sometimes helping them just understand what is impacting the valuation, but more importantly, here are some steps we can take on a going forward basis to improve valuation and improve marketability. And here’s a due diligence checklist. And this is what your prospective buyer is going to be asking of you. So, rather than try to do all this in, you know, 30 days, when you get the request for information, why don’t we change some policies and procedures on a going forward basis to start compiling that data and then you’re ready to go. You have like a very organized well run machine when you’re ready to sell. And that also improves valuation.

David Ray: [00:37:09] And, Michael, related to that, one of the tools we’ve used with business owners that we’ve worked with is to basically go through a quick assessment based on eight factors that we think drive business value through the eyes of sophisticated buyers. And try to get them to critically and independently think about where they are on those eight factors. And then, we often take some of that information and use this provider model we’ve developed for business owners that simulates liquidation at different valuations. And then, your ability to kind of sustain a lifestyle, all of that. But it really is.

David Ray: [00:37:47] Things like culture are very important in, for example, assessing value, depending on the buyer, of course. But things like that – obviously Matt alluded to this – if you got a subscription type business where the cash flows are really predictable, you’ve already got a foot up on a lot of folks.

Mike Blake: [00:38:07] But when we think about transferring a business, the word that comes to mind is selling the business. But it occurs to me that there’s more than one way to kind of skin that cat, right? You don’t necessarily have to. Or are there other ways to effectuate a transfer of a business to family members other than simply selling it to them? And if so, what are the most common ones that you see?

Matthew DiCicco: [00:38:32] Yeah. And there are several estate planning type tools that can be implemented. And right now, frankly, you’re seeing somewhat of a push in this area because of the current estate tax and estate and gift tax exemption for 2021, so 11.7 million per person and 23.4 for a husband and wife. You know, you can take advantage of that. Now, that all is expected to sunset with the Tax Cut Jobs Act on December 31 of 2025, and there’s several different plans that are out there right now. The Biden Plan, you know, I expect it’ll probably be somewhat of a reversion back to 2009 rates to three-and-a-half million for the estate tax, maybe a million for the gift tax.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:39:19] But, you know, so there are estate planning tools that you can use and there are several. Most of which, you know, I would recommend you talk to your legal advisor or to Brady Ware, or your tax advisor. But things like the Grantor Retained Annuity Trusts and the Grantor Retained Unitrust, the GRAT and the GRUT, both allow you to create an irrevocable trust. And put those business assets in there for a defined period of time and transfer to another generation. Intentionally Defective Grantor Trust, where the guarantor business owners pay taxes to allow the trust assets to appreciate. So, there are several different estate planning tools that can be used. That could be another topic in and of itself.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:40:10] But another thing that I’ve seen used quite frequently is creating and gifting non-voting shares of stock, voting and non-voting shares. And that’s also sometimes a way to manage those family dynamics that come up where you can have one family member of the next generation that’s really been active in the business. But you have several family members that work in the business and take income from the business and rely upon it. And so, you can create family voting and non-voting shares or membership units. And the benefit of that, when you’re transferring it from the parent-donor down to the kid, the parent-donor can retain the voting shares, the kids can get the non-voting shares, and then the gifts can be discounted for lack of marketability, lack of control, discounts, other things to try to get under those as gift exemption should they decline.

David Ray: [00:41:10] And, Mike, the one thing I’d add to that is that, one of the challenges we’re seeing in this environment is, with some of the multiples that are being paid by private equity with the amount of money they have sitting on the sidelines, that if there’s a material number of shares that need to be transferred with a single owner, that owner is probably going to have to be somewhat altruistic in order to be able to transfer rather than to sell outright to somebody. And so, that’s kind of created a challenge for some businesses in this high valuation environment.

David Ray: [00:41:46] The other thing we’ve seen, you have to have a certain size for this to make sense because there’s a lot of administrative costs associated with it. But we’re seeing more ESOP transactions, frankly, with some of the folks that we deal with. And we know a couple of them really well that are in the throes of an ESOP transaction. That’s another alternative in this area.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:42:08] And it would not surprise me if, you know, right now, the maximum capital gains rate is 20 percent with the addition of 3.8 percent on top of that for a combined total of 23.8 percent. Some of the proposals that I’ve seen coming out yesterday, Bloomberg reported that it was going to be 39.6 percent under Biden’s Plan as the top capital gains rate, with that additional 3.8 percent. CNBC reported today, it’s likely going to be less than that, but nobody really knows. But if that doubles, I think you’re going to see more and more folks that are looking to avoid any way they can that capital gains rate, which may cause them to want to seek an alternative other than to sell it in a third party transaction.

Mike Blake: [00:42:56] We’re talking to David Ray and Matt DiCicco of Eubel Brady & Suttman. And the topic is, Should I let my children or family take over the business? You know, working with your clients and just talking to them, I’m curious, is there any kind of consensus or common sentiment around giving their children a leg up in life? You know, many of these businesses were probably created in that generation. They’re self-made high net worth individuals as opposed to having inherited it. Do you find that it troubles them at all to turn something over a big head start to their children? Or maybe, do they tend to find that gratifying that they consider that an accomplishment of their lives? Where do most of your clients, you think, fall on that spectrum?

David Ray: [00:43:43] And, Michael, it’s a pretty simple tool we use is what we call an ownership issues assessment. And one of the things on there, it asks basic questions like, you know, how important is it to you to maintain the culture whether you transfer the business or sell the business? And so, it gives you insight into how important legacy is to them. And I believe, by and large, other than maybe the exception where somebody is just trying to maximize money, they’re just a person who just wants to make money.

David Ray: [00:44:17] But I think most folks, those soft issues like you’re talking about, are important to them. They’ve worked hard, maybe they’ve inherited this business from their mother or father, and they’ve worked hard to try to maintain that business’s reputation and grow its value. And they want to see it passed to the next generation. And that legacy is important to them. And so, in those cases, I think they are trying to do everything possible to (A) create interest from that child, and then (B) to prepare them. And Matt alluded to some things earlier, where they may go out and work in another company, get some training through that, and then come back in more prepared. But yes, we see that pretty regularly.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:45:00] And I think some people would say that shirtsleeves to shirtsleeves, you talked about earlier, is caused by as generations turn, they lose the hunger, the ambition, the drive. They’ve grown up privileged and wealthy. And how do you continue to stoke that fire into the next generation? So, some would say giving them too much of a head start in life is actually a bad thing. You know, others feel differently. But, yeah, I mean, that is a problem of balancing that approach to make sure that the kids still have drive and ambition and want to move on to the next level.

Mike Blake: [00:45:37] We only have time for a couple more questions. But before we do wrap up, one question I did want to make sure that I ask you is, how important is legacy to your clients? And how important is it to them that what they built simply survives beyond their own lifetimes? And maybe you can even touch upon whether or not you find how frequently your clients want to have their legacy live on maybe through charitable contributions, foundations, things of that nature? But starting with focusing on the business, you know, how important is it to your clients that they just simply want to make sure that whatever they built doesn’t go away like a couple of years after they step back. Even taking out the financial consideration, they just don’t want to see what they built over decades turn into, you know, a pile of sand.

David Ray: [00:46:36] I think I’ll use an example. When you go back to like, ’09, ’10, right after the Great Recession, trying to come out of that, there were some people who were going into that, the legacy was really important. But they became so beat down by what they had to go through and how the business suffered. And I believe this is the case in the COVID environment with certain businesses, where some of those have really gotten beaten up. And so, I think, Michael, in those situations, you’ve got people who all of a sudden kind of threw that legacy to the side of the road, that lays the issues to the side of the road.

David Ray: [00:47:14] However, I think by and large, there is great pride and there is a part of their self-image – that Matt touched on earlier – that is the business. And, in fact, I think that’s one of the reasons that slows down this process of getting into succession planning, because there’s such an attachment between their self-worth and the image of the business that the business owner has trouble separate themselves from that. And so, I would say, based upon just that issue alone, that that legacy issue is very important if you survey the majority of the people that we deal with.

Matthew DiCicco: [00:47:53] Yeah. And I guess to add on to that, I would say that I see this issue of legacy being more important to those folks that founded the business, you know, the ones that grew the business from the start. And legacy is not just tied to themselves or their family or the business itself. A lot of times legacy includes those relationships with employees, with customers, with vendors, a number of different folks that in many regards grew up with that business owner, and with the business, and wanting to make sure that the business vision and relationships continue on into perpetuity becomes very important.

Mike Blake: [00:48:35] This has been a very insightful conversation. I think our audience is going to get a lot out of this. We didn’t get to cover everything, and I think we could have covered today probably even a fraction of it. But if people want to follow up, they have questions about this issue of transferring a business to family members, whether it’s a next generation or just simply within the same one, can they contact you to to discuss it? And if so, what’s the best way to do so?

Matthew DiCicco: [00:49:00] Yeah. We would welcome that, David and I would. And either, the best way to reach us through our 800 number, 800-391-1223. Or you can go to our website by Googling Eubel Brady & Suttman Investment Wealth Management or going to ebs-asset.com. We would love to talk to you.

Mike Blake: [00:49:26] Well, that’s going to wrap it up for today’s program. I’d like to thank David Ray and Matt DiCicco of Eubel Brady & Suttman so much for joining us and sharing their expertise with us.

Mike Blake: [00:49:36] We’ll be exploring a new topic each week, so please tune in so that when you’re faced with your next business decision, you have clear vision when making it. If you enjoy these podcasts, please consider leaving a review of your favorite podcast aggregator. It helps people find us that we can help them. If you would like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself, and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. Once again, this is Mike Blake. Our sponsor is Brady Ware & Company. And this has been the Decision Vision podcast.

 

Tagged With: Brady Ware, Brady Ware & Company, business succession planning, business transition, David Ray, EBS, Eubel Brady & Suttman, Family Business, family business transition, Matthew DiCicco, Michael Blake, Mike Blake, wealth management

Decision Vision Episode 113: Should I Disclose My Mental Illness? – An Interview with Jacqui Chew, iFusion and TEDxAtlanta

April 22, 2021 by John Ray

Jacqui Chew
Decision Vision
Decision Vision Episode 113: Should I Disclose My Mental Illness? - An Interview with Jacqui Chew, iFusion and TEDxAtlanta
Loading
00:00 /
RSS Feed
Share
Link
Embed

Download file

Jacqui Chew

Decision Vision Episode 113:  Should I Disclose My Mental Illness? – An Interview with Jacqui Chew, iFusion and TEDxAtlanta

Diagnosed with bipolar disorder in 2005, Jacqui Chew seeks to normalize the conversation around mental illness. In a candid and open conversation with host Mike Blake, Jacqui discussed the journey to her diagnosis and how she’s learned to manage it. She also offered advice to HR directors and the rest of us who are approached by an employee or friend who discloses their mental illness. “Decision Vision” is presented by Brady Ware & Company.

Jacqui Chew, iFusion and TEDxAtlanta

Jacqui Chew is an award-winning marketing and business executive with more than two decades of experience delivering creative, data-driven strategies for venture-backed, high-growth companies. A proven positioning expert, brand builder, and innovation thought-leader with P/L experience, her programs contribute to MQL growth.

A creative problem solver and convener, Jacqui believes in the potential for ideas to change the world. As licensee of TEDxAtlanta, one of the largest TED affiliates in the region, she galvanizes a team of volunteers to produce the annual TEDxAtlanta show. Under her leadership, tickets for nine of the 11 sold out weeks before. This must-attend event has become the platform for tomorrow’s leaders playing host to renowned bioethicist Paul Root Wolpe, hunger eradication entrepreneur Jasmine Crowe, and Ryan Gravel, the “father” of the Atlanta Beltline.

Jacqui served as senior vice president of marketing at Avertium, an award-winning cybersecurity firm founded from a three-company roll-up. She led brand marketing, demand generation, social media, PR, sales enablement, analytics, marketing operations, and communications. During her tenure, Jacqui spearheaded the company’s successful repositioning, messaging and rebranding and, its CRM/marketing automation platform integration. She also worked cross-functionally to support the acquisition of a fourth company during this period.

Previously, as CMO-in-residence at the Advanced Technology Development Center at Georgia Tech (ATDC), a globally ranked business incubator, she worked with the 170+ companies to develop their go-to-market and product strategy. During her tenure, she also developed and taught the incubator’s first strategic marketing curriculum.

Prior to ATDC, Jacqui founded iFusion, a fractional CMO consultancy for high-growth venture-backed companies. Primary client projects: positioning, messaging, customer journey mapping, marketing plan development and marketing and sales alignment. The company led the launch of more than two dozen companies/products and contributed to $100+m in funds raised.

Jacqui served in executive marketing roles at PeopleSoft (acq by Oracle), Stonesoft (acq by McAfee now Intel), Silverpop(acq by IBM) and worked, on the agency side, with IBM Global Services, The Weather Channel, KontrolFreek, MessageGears, Preparis, Venture Atlanta, EarthLink and eBay.

Website | LinkedIn | Jacqui’s TEDx Video

Mike Blake, Brady Ware & Company

Mike Blake, Host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series

Michael Blake is the host of the “Decision Vision” podcast series and a Director of Brady Ware & Company. Mike specializes in the valuation of intellectual property-driven firms, such as software firms, aerospace firms, and professional services firms, most frequently in the capacity as a transaction advisor, helping clients obtain great outcomes from complex transaction opportunities. He is also a specialist in the appraisal of intellectual properties as stand-alone assets, such as software, trade secrets, and patents.

Mike has been a full-time business appraiser for 13 years with public accounting firms, boutique business appraisal firms, and an owner of his own firm. Prior to that, he spent 8 years in venture capital and investment banking, including transactions in the U.S., Israel, Russia, Ukraine, and Belarus.

Brady Ware & Company

Brady Ware & Company is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm which helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality. Brady Ware services clients nationally from its offices in Alpharetta, GA; Columbus and Dayton, OH; and Richmond, IN. The firm is growth-minded, committed to the regions in which they operate, and most importantly, they make significant investments in their people and service offerings to meet the changing financial needs of those they are privileged to serve. The firm is dedicated to providing results that make a difference for its clients.

Decision Vision Podcast Series

“Decision Vision” is a podcast covering topics and issues facing small business owners and connecting them with solutions from leading experts. This series is presented by Brady Ware & Company. If you are a decision-maker for a small business, we’d love to hear from you. Contact us at decisionvision@bradyware.com and make sure to listen to every Thursday to the “Decision Vision” podcast.

Past episodes of “Decision Vision” can be found at decisionvisionpodcast.com. “Decision Vision” is produced and broadcast by the North Fulton studio of Business RadioX®.

Connect with Brady Ware & Company:

Website | LinkedIn | Facebook | Twitter | Instagram

TRANSCRIPT

Intro: [00:00:02] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast series focusing on critical business decisions. Brought to you by Brady Ware & Company. Brady Ware is a regional full-service accounting and advisory firm that helps businesses and entrepreneurs make visions a reality.

Mike Blake: [00:00:21] Welcome to Decision Vision, a podcast giving you, the listener, clear vision to make great decisions. In each episode, we discuss the process of decision making on a different topic from the business owners’ or executives’ perspective. We aren’t necessarily telling you what to do, but we can put you in a position to make an informed decision on your own and understand when you might need help along the way.

Mike Blake: [00:00:40] My name is Mike Blake and I’m your host for today’s program. I’m a Director at Brady Ware & Company, a full service accounting firm based in Dayton, Ohio, with offices in Dayton; Columbus, Ohio; Richmond, Indiana; and Alpharetta, Georgia. Brady Ware is sponsoring this podcast, which is being recorded in Atlanta per social distancing protocols. If you would like to engage with me on social media with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself, and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. If you like this podcast, please subscribe on your favorite podcast aggregator, and please consider leaving a review of the podcast as well.

Mike Blake: [00:01:15] Today’s topic is, Should I be open about my mental illness? One in five U.S. adults report that they suffer with some sort of mental illness, and an estimated two-and-a-half percent of U.S. adults experience bipolar disorder at some point in their lifetimes, 7.1. percent of U.S. adults are characterized as having major depression. And these are numbers that go back to 2019. And in case you haven’t heard, most of us had kind of a rough year in 2020. We had a combination of a once in a century global pandemic. We had unprecedented, massive social upheaval. And in some places in the country, we had murder hornets.

Mike Blake: [00:01:59] And, you know, for a lot of us, it’s been a rough ride, a lot rougher than usual. And most of us, I’m sure, have heard, many have read, and seen many stories of the mental toll that the pandemic has taken on many of us, ranging from job loss to being cooped up at home, to having to take on home roles that we were not prepared for. For example, I am the world’s lousiest Spanish teacher for home schooling our son, which is not necessarily our plan. We can only hope we can order a Taco Bell because I think that’s the only thing I’m qualifying him to do. But his ten, he might grow out of it.

Mike Blake: [00:02:39] And, you know, you think about mental illness, and I’m hoping that kind of one good thing that comes out of the pandemic is, I hope it makes us more aware of mental illness and it kind of give it its due. You know, years ago, I served on the board of a nonprofit called Care and Counseling Center of Georgia, whose mission was to provide mental health care services to low income folks. And they did a really good job of it in spite of my being on the board.

Mike Blake: [00:03:13] But one of the things you learn about mental health and mental – you will actually learn about two things. Number one is, your mental health is still sort of taken a backseat to so-called physical health. And, you know, you grow up and you talk about people who are either tough or they’re not tough. And some people of faith will claim that that makes them impervious to any kind of mental illness and so forth. Even to the point where, you know, it wasn’t that long ago, I think a lot of people thought that mental illness was a choice.

Mike Blake: [00:03:51] And secondly, I think people are understanding now that not only does it need to be destigmatize, but the thing on mental health is that if you don’t have mental health, a lot of bad downstream things happen. They can happen at the micro level where it impacts your job, it impacts your personal relationships, it impacts your ability to be a fully engaged, fully actualized member of society, fully actualized person. And in very extreme cases, particularly the United States where gun ownership is plentiful, mental illness that is either undiagnosed, untreated, unmonitored, simply not paying enough attention to, can have, frankly, catastrophic results.

Mike Blake: [00:04:38] And I can’t help but wonder how different might our world be if we gave, frankly, mental illnesses its due. And I think now as we are entering this this trans-pandemic phase where, you know, many of us are becoming vaccinated and we’re starting to kind of wrestle with returning to work, we’re wrestling with returning to restaurants, going back to baseball games, and so forth. And, you know, the mental health issues aren’t going away. In fact, you could argue that there are more mental health issues that are going to be created by sending people back to the office.

Mike Blake: [00:05:18] And I think and I hope that one thing is abundantly clear that, you know, mental health simply cannot be ignored anymore. It’s not the moral thing to do. And I would argue it’s not the business correct thing to do. Because if you have even a small business of 25 people, statistically speaking, five of those people are really struggling with a diagnosable disorder. And one of them probably has something akin to bipolar disorder. And they’ve just done a very good job of hiding it or we’ve done a very good job of not seeing it.

Mike Blake: [00:05:57] And so, therefore, I wanted to cover this topic. It’s not an easy topic. I’m certainly not a physician, but I think it’s so important. I think we have to equip ourselves. Statistically speaking, again, there are thousands of listeners listening to this that are struggling with this question. And then, for people like me, who at least I don’t believe that I have a diagnosable mental illness, others may disagree, but I don’t believe that I do.

Mike Blake: [00:06:22] But I do want to make sure that every resource is available in my network and my company – of which I’m a shareholder – that if there are folks – again, statistically speaking, there are a number of people – that are struggling with mental illness of some kind that we, as a company, do the right thing. That we are compassionate, that we are accommodating, and that we stand up for them, and we don’t abandon them. We don’t try to force them into the shadows. And so, I hope that that thesis makes sense to use as we kind of go through, I think, what is a very challenging and necessary topic.

Mike Blake: [00:07:01] And joining us today to help us talk about this is Jacqui Chew. Jacqui works at the intersection of storytelling, innovation, and business. And I’ve known her for a long time. In fact, I took over her office once. She deploys the power of narrative design and reframing an organization’s brand story for resonance and to inspire action. Described as the Lara Croft of problem solving, Jacqui is a seasoned business operator with a passion for building inclusive teams and working cross-functionally to bring disparate groups together towards a common goal.

Mike Blake: [00:07:33] As the curator and licensee of TEDxAtlanta, Jacqui is always on the lookout for change makers and innovations that are solving for the challenges of today and those just around the corner. Under her leadership, first of TEDxPeachtree from 2009 to 2018 and presently of TEDxAtlanta, Atlanta has grown in recognition within the global TEDx community as an innovation hub for technology, health care, and social impact initiatives. And I’m a big fan of TEDx. I watch three to four TEDx videos a week. And I’ve watched Jacqui’s video as well, we’ll refer to that in our conversation. Jacqui is resourceful, tenacious, and well-networked in the Atlanta business, social impact, and technology communities. Jacqui Chew, welcome to the program.

Jacqui Chew: [00:08:16] Thank you for having me, Mike.

Mike Blake: [00:08:21] So, Jacqui, I brought you on because you’ve chosen to hold yourself out there as a person that has bipolar disorder and has figured out how to navigate life with that particular disorder. So, you know, I’ve read about bipolar disorder. Thank God I don’t have it. I don’t have a family member that has it. I have a couple of friends that have. But explain to the audience in your kind of best terms, how would you describe bipolar disorder to somebody?

Jacqui Chew: [00:08:54] So, first of all, I would call it a mood disorder, because the symptoms manifests itself in extremes in mood changes. And this isn’t to be confused with a person who is “moody.” But mood changes from the standpoint of severe depression to the point where you would lose interest in what you normally enjoy. Or you have a really severe depressive episode would be if you are unable to sleep and you find yourself crying uncontrollably at absolutely nothing, severe fatigue. So, these are severe manifestations of depression. So, there’s that aspect of it.

Jacqui Chew: [00:09:50] At the worst in terms of depression, the worst manifestation of a symptom on the depression side is suicide, thoughts of self-harm and, in some cases, self-harm. So, that’s that part of it. The other side of the equation or the other end of the pendulum is mania and manic episode. So, mania is generally characterized as severe anger to the point of violence. So, for instance, this individual that I know from our support group sessions, when he is in mania, he specifically does not drive. He actually specifically has stopped driving because there are certain types of traffic situations that trigger the symptoms and cause him to act out in violence.

Jacqui Chew: [00:10:59] Other expected symptoms of mania is excessive shopping. You know, maxing out your credit cards. And then, yet another is hypersexuality, which can be really, really hard. Now, I’m not a doctor. These are sort of observations and sharings over the years since – gosh – I’ve been going to support group sessions and since 2005. So, over the years, these are some of the experiences that my fellow attendees have shared with the group. And so, these are some of the symptoms. It’s generally two opposite extremes experienced by an individual, and each of those extremes could be experienced by the person for a couple hours, a couple of weeks.

Jacqui Chew: [00:11:59] I’ll give you an example. There was a point in time when I wasn’t diagnosed, which I remember staying up for three days and going through a complete cleaning of my house. Now, I did end up with a very clean condo, but I didn’t realize at the time that I was experiencing mania and that I wasn’t able to sleep. I was hyperactive. There was just a lot of energy. And I was probably a lot blown up. I was testier and quicker to anger than normal. And this went on for a couple weeks, as I recall. Now, looking back after my diagnosis in 2005, I recognized through my therapy sessions that these moments in time or periods in my life that I had dismissed as just me being the eccentric me that I am were actually symptoms. I was experiencing episodes. That was a very long explanation.

Mike Blake: [00:13:13] Well, I think it deserves it. And for the audience listening at home, too, I think bipolar disorder until recently was more commonly known as manic depressive disorder. Correct?

Jacqui Chew: [00:13:26] Yes. Correct.

Mike Blake: [00:13:27] That’s sort of the new or maybe that’s the clinical. I’m not sure why the name change. But if it sounds like manic depressive disorder, the answer is, yeah, because it is. So, you know, I watched your video and you described a time which I guess is 15, 16 years ago when you kind of came to a crisis point effectively where you sought specific medical attention, and I want to come to that.

Mike Blake: [00:13:56] But before I get to that particular moment, I’m curious, before you got to that moment, was there a gradual kind of trail of breadcrumbs, if you will, of increasingly frequent or severe symptoms that led you to that point where, “Man, this is not right. This is not what most human beings have to go through.” Or as is the case with something like schizophrenia, did one day all of a sudden or in a very short period of time, you simply became bipolar. Does it work one of the two ways? Did you have one of those two experiences?

Jacqui Chew: [00:14:34] I can’t speak for, you know, my peers. But I can tell you, for me, I had no idea that anything was wrong with me. That period of time of three days where I stayed up and cleaned my loft, I think that was back in 2004. And I wasn’t diagnosed until towards the end of January of 2005. And the reason why I know this is because – and I talk about this in my TED talk – it was an evening, I was watching Jeopardy, and then I was prompt while I was watching Jeopardy, which is not something that you would normally do. Though, I didn’t think very much of it, actually, which is kind of strange in and of itself now in hindsight.

Jacqui Chew: [00:15:30] And the next day going into work, I found myself, essentially, just staring at a document for a very long time. It didn’t seem like a very long time, but it turned out to be a very long time and then realizing that I wasn’t processing any of the words that I was looking at. And that was when it was like a stroke of panic. It was a surge of panic where I knew something was wrong, I didn’t know what was wrong. So, I called my regular doctor and it was an emergency. I called him and I explained what had happened. I didn’t explain the night before and the crime, but I just explained to him that I really couldn’t understand anything that I was reading.

Jacqui Chew: [00:16:27] He was clearly concerned and he gave me the names of three doctors and phone numbers. Now, that in and of itself was a little strange because I could write numbers and read numbers, but I couldn’t really write the names of the doctors and read it back to myself. I don’t really know how to explain that. So, I had to remember, so I, essentially, just remembered the first name and wrote down the first number, because that’s all that I could process at the time. And so, I was very fortunate.

Jacqui Chew: [00:17:06] Now, I called that particular doctor, that psychiatrist. Now, he couldn’t see me for a-month-and-a-half. I mean, that kind of tells you, 2005, our health care system was just not geared toward helping people with mental health challenges. So, unless, of course, had I said to my doctor that I thought about killing myself, I had thoughts of self-harm, that would have been a whole different ball of wax.

Mike Blake: [00:17:38] Right. You have to move to the front of the line at that point.

Jacqui Chew: [00:17:40] Pretty much. And there’s another story about that. I’ll explain that in a second. So, there wasn’t a slot in time for six weeks. I made the appointment. I wrote down the date. And then, I was very fortunate because a few days later the office called me. The doctor’s office called me and said, “Hey, we have a cancellation. Would you like to come in? Are you available to come in?” And I did. So, that was super fortunate for me because, at that point in time, I was starting to hallucinate. And I knew I was hallucinating because there’s no way that I was hanging off of the rafters on my loft with a noose around my neck. I knew that wasn’t happening. So, I knew I was hallucinating. So, that began my journey until today. That was how it all began.

Mike Blake: [00:18:48] So, when you were first diagnosed, did you feel that you had to hide your condition? Did you feel like you sort of had to tell the whole world? Did it not make an impact if you felt like it’s just like being told I have arthritis? How did you kind of emotionally react to that?

Jacqui Chew: [00:19:12] Well, so you have to remember, this is 2005, before people could talk about these things, before it was normal. I mean, ADHD in your kid was something to be ashamed of, still, at the time. Or people would talk about their kids in [inaudible] like, “Oh, my child has autism.” Just none of this was okay to talk about. And so, I’m thinking about becoming an evangelist or raising awareness. I wasn’t. I had no idea, first of all, what this is all about.

Jacqui Chew: [00:19:56] First of all, I wasn’t diagnosed with bipolar disorder. My original diagnosis was schizophrenia. Which, you know, there are similarities in symptoms. I mean, the fact that I was seeing myself hanging from the rafters and I was hearing voices, that is classic schizophrenia symptoms. So, I was diagnosed that way and I was prescribed medication for that. And along with going into therapy with my psychiatrist, he also recommended that I go to a support group on a regular basis. So, I didn’t know that it was a lifelong condition. That there is no cure. I had no clue. And it was one of those, like, eye for an eye. So, if I take my meds, I do all the things that my doctor wanted me to do, I’m going to be okay. All of this will stop. And I can just move on. So, this is 2005, and I did.

Jacqui Chew: [00:21:15] And then, for the longest time, I just assumed that I was fine. [Inaudible]. Now, we did find out six weeks later or two months later that the schizophrenic diagnosis was incorrect. It was bipolar disorder because my hallucinations receded once I was putting into place some of the sleep hygiene, the official term. Like, taking the television out of your bedroom. By the way, you cannot or should not, no one should be watching television and go to sleep. It’s really bad for you. I can’t tell you the science behind it, it was explained to me, I forget. But it’s really bad.

Jacqui Chew: [00:22:03] And so, just practicing good sleep hygiene, getting eight hours of sleep, ensuring that it’s deep REM restful sleep. Those were the measures that I took. When I went back to my sixth week visit, it was hallucinations that got away. Some of the other symptoms still persisted. And he was able to give me a correct diagnosis of bipolar disorder and then we went from there. So, I was in no way thinking about telling people. It was more about getting well. How do I get well? How do I ensure that I can cognitively process reading works?

Jacqui Chew: [00:22:55] I’m a knowledge worker. It’s what I do for a living. I’m a writer. I tell stories. I read messaging. I help entrepreneurs with their positioning. And if I’m unable to be on my game from a cognitive function point of view, then I don’t have a way to be self-sufficient. It’s Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs. You first have to take care of your bare essentials. And because I was living on my own, my family is still 10,000 miles away. I essentially was my own person, my own provider, and I had to take care of myself. So, that was the sole focus.

Jacqui Chew: [00:23:46] I have to tell you that this erroneous notion that bipolar can be cured. And after a period of time, I can just go back to doing all the things that I used to do. You know, that’s not even good for me, was a really bad thing and catastrophic because I had a relapse and a really severe episode of 15 months starting February-ish of 2008. And I didn’t come out of it until July, August of 2009.

Mike Blake: [00:24:20] And, you know, that’s something I think is very underappreciated, maybe unappreciated, about mental illness. I’m not a doctor either, but I’m not aware of any mental illness that is considered curable. I’ve never heard a psychiatrist say, “I cured somebody of X or Y.” Right now with the current state of the art science, it’s all about treatment and management. Right? Again, unless there’s a radical shift in technology, it ain’t going away. And if you’re afflicted in some way like that, then it’s just going to be your companion.

Jacqui Chew: [00:25:01] Right. Well, you know, it’s amazing. We know we have gone so far or come so far in terms of technological advancements. Advancements in all kinds of areas. But scientists are still somewhat mystified by the brain and how it works. They do know that it’s a chemical imbalance. It is truly a chemical imbalance. They’re not entirely sure what causes it altogether. They know that some types of bipolar disorder, and there are four types. Some types are triggered by damage to the hippocampus part of the brain. Some of it has to do with the neurotransmitters not firing the right way. So, there’s not a lot of clarity.

Jacqui Chew: [00:26:10] And then, of course, there’s environmental factors as well. There are theories that it’s genetic – actually, it’s not a theory. They’ve done experiments with twins and they’ve seen that mood disorders, there’s a genetic underpinning to mood disorders. And environmental factors like stress or death in family or substance abuse, those factors could trigger symptoms.

Mike Blake: [00:26:50] So, yes. I want to kind of seize on that a little bit, grab a hold of that for a little bit, because you mentioned in your video that you had to implement a certain rule. Because there’s one certain work trigger that you highlighted. So, I was wondering if you could talk about that and has it worked?

Jacqui Chew: [00:27:10] You are referring, like, to the no asshole rule.

Mike Blake: [00:27:15] I am indeed. Thanks for coming on the podcast anyway. I hope you’re alright.

Jacqui Chew: [00:27:23] You know, I think so. So, in mood disorders, like for me, there are stressors and there are triggers. So, stressors are conditions that kind of exacerbate that gives me a heightened sense of stress – hence, stressors – which then triggers a certain emotion. Triggers are, literally like for me – I can’t speak for the rest of my peers here – there are certain behavior, certain personality types, and, sometimes, in some cases certain phrases that trigger me to anger, to behave in a certain way that I have no control over. And they also trigger such an overwhelming sense of doubt and fear and shame, even, that I have no control over. It’s completely irrational and I have no control over it.

Jacqui Chew: [00:28:38] And so, the no asshole rule has everything to do with a certain kind of personality that, unfortunately, is quite persistent in the technology, I dare say, in this –

Mike Blake: [00:28:54] There’s no shortage of assholes. Yeah. Yeah.

Jacqui Chew: [00:28:59] Yes.

Mike Blake: [00:28:59] And we make more.

Jacqui Chew: [00:29:01] So, when I say asshole, what I mean is there are certain traits. Like, people who always demand more and they move the goalpost. I think we’ve all experienced coworkers or managers like that, who they demand without ever providing positive reinforcement. And when a certain goal had been attained, instead of taking a moment to acknowledge or appreciate, they move the goalpost just a little bit further. And for me, that sort of personality is a trigger for me. And so, I’ve tried very, very hard to steer away from working with people like that. And in many cases, I’ve had to develop coping mechanisms. So, you hear that a lot if you come to my group support sessions. We talk about coping mechanisms.

Mike Blake: [00:30:25] I’m sure you do.

Jacqui Chew: [00:30:26] And just techniques to moderate the impact of certain kinds of behavior that trigger us. Because in many cases, in the workplace, you can’t always remove yourself from personalities like that. You just have to find ways of reducing and minimizing the exposure to personalities like that.

Mike Blake: [00:30:53] So, I’d like to talk about that because I think that’s a very important subject and starts to intersect with the business part of it, if you will. And what I’d like to ask about that, first of all is this, is that, given that you know these things about yourself, do you entirely take it upon yourself to minimize your exposure to these triggers? Or do you kind of try to work with the people that you’re involved with and say, “Hey, look. You know, I sort of have this thing going on and these four things are really not good. And I’d like to try to avoid those in this environment as much.” can you have conversations like that? Am I just sort of off the reservation?

Jacqui Chew: [00:31:45] If I care enough about the person and respect the person enough, quite honestly, Mike, I’ll take the trouble to do that. Because honestly – let me give you an analogy and perhaps this would become clear. If someone is being abusive or discriminatory toward me, it is not my responsibility to tell them that they are and to teach them some other way. I don’t think it’s my responsibility. And I don’t want to carry that burden. That’s me personally. I know other people would.

Jacqui Chew: [00:32:25] However, if I care and I respect the person enough, and want to continue to have a relationship with that person, an ongoing sustainable relationship with that person, then I would because I want a sustainable ongoing relationship. Then, the amount of investment that I would have to make that the outcome warrants the investment. Because it’s a big investment. It is very difficult. So, first of all, that person has to have some semblance of empathy.

Mike Blake: [00:33:04] Yeah. That it’s a nonstarter, right?

Jacqui Chew: [00:33:08] Correct. One of the primary reasons why assholes are assholes, Mike, is because they lack empathy and self-awareness. And I, in my years, have come to the conclusion that some people just can’t help themselves. And who am I to help them stop being an asshole? So, I’m just going to work with them as best as the situation calls for it to get the job done, to accomplish the goal, and move on. That’s how I feel. That’s my coping mechanism. It would take too much energy for me to manage my disorder and try to change these people.

Jacqui Chew: [00:34:00] The situation is quite different if a person is exhibiting these behavior traits, these less desirable behavior traits, but has some semblance of empathy. They just don’t know it. They don’t know what they’re doing. But if they did, if I thought that if they did know what they were doing, and it’s the impact of their behavior on others that they would consider a different way. If I detected that and I wanted a sustainable relationship with these people, I would make the investment.

Jacqui Chew: [00:34:39] And yes, I would absolutely say, “Look -” and I would train it to the standpoint of I have a mood disorder. And that, too, is a very self-centric thing and that’s just not my style. I would make the standpoint of, “Look, when you say these kinds of things in this sort of a situation, you may not mean it this way.” But let me tell you how it’s being perceived. And if this is not the way you want it to be perceived, then let’s find a better way of articulating your thoughts. And that’s how I do it.

Mike Blake: [00:35:20] So, beyond this particular approach, which is a very sort of – let’s call it – individualized or even a non-scalable approach, because that’s been focused to one person at a time. And I think that’s part of where the ROI equation comes in that you’re describing. Are there other things that you need to do to kind of protect yourself? For example, I would imagine because you said that a good sleep schedule is essential to managing your condition. To me, that says it would be very difficult for you to be in a culture that thrives on the all-nighter. It sounds like that’s something that could be not only suboptimal, but potentially even dangerous for you.

Jacqui Chew: [00:36:05] Yes. And, actually, when I violate my no asshole rule and I allow myself to be consumed by let’s work an all-nighter type of culture is when I get into trouble. I literally get myself very sick. And so, yes, there’s a measure of protection that I have to put around my boundaries. So, this is where boundaries come in. And people without the bipolar disorder have boundaries.

Jacqui Chew: [00:36:41] Now, what is really interesting, I think, in my situation that I think is worth noting for your listeners who may find themselves in a similar situation is, I am naturally a high performance, hard charging individual. That is my nature.

Mike Blake: [00:37:04] Yeah. I’ve seen it.

Jacqui Chew: [00:37:04] Unfortunately, my nature is hurtful to my condition. So, I have to fight my default and learn a new default. And so, what I’ve done is learning a new default – perhaps, old dogs can’t learn new tricks, as the saying goes. Learning a new default has proven to be too difficult. So, what I’ve done is I’ve created extensions to the default. So, it’s like home improvement. I’ve added extensions and caveats to the default where, yes, when it is absolutely necessary, I will work the 80 hour week. But I will not work the 80 hour week, I would work for a week, maybe two, at most. And then, I have to go back to a 40, 50 hour week, which is a normal week for me. Or I take a mental health game – you hear people say that all the time – where you take a Friday and you just switch it up.

Jacqui Chew: [00:38:18] Now, I have learned as a coping mechanism to turn off my phone and go off grid one day out of every weekend. You have Saturday, you have Sunday, so I either pick a Saturday or Sunday – usually it’s a Sunday – where I completely go off grid and I do not check phone, emails, nothing. So, it’s kind of like an electronic detox or digital detox.

Mike Blake: [00:38:51] Well, you know, I mean, a lot of the things you’re describing sound like they’re probably pretty useful for people that aren’t fighting bipolar disorder, frankly. I can tell you something, I’ve started to become very mindful of my own sleep schedule, because when you can operate in short sleep, it’s a blessing and a curse. It’s a blessing because it allows you to to do more. But for me, Parkinson’s Law just takes over. And all it does, it allows me to outwork my mistakes. And that’s not really an optimal place to be anyway. So, you know, the way you described these sort of parameters in a way that I think are consistent with kind of best practices for mental maintenance anyway.

Jacqui Chew: [00:39:39] Indeed. So, many of the measures that I’ve taken, anyone and everyone, really, should take regardless of what sort of a workspace they’re on, it really doesn’t matter. And so, I’ll be very specific. If you have a television in your bedroom, remove it. This is probably the hardest one for most people, because a lot of people I know have televisions in their bedrooms. It’s terrible. Eight hours of sleep? Now, some people need eight. I need six hours of sleep. Six good hours of sleep is sufficient for me. It’s the quality sleep more than the quantity of sleep.

Jacqui Chew: [00:40:31] So, for me to process problems, I need to be doing something else. So, this is the other thing about corporate America is, it’s not always forgiving about extracurricular activities. There are some cultures that they don’t condone a person, an employee, having nonprofit work or volunteer work or anything like that, when they want you and all of you and all of your time.

Jacqui Chew: [00:41:06] So, I stay away from cultures like that because that is not how I operate ultimately. My optimal goal is the ability to problem solve at work, but I’m on problem solving whilst I’m doing other things, other activities that are not work related, like organizing TEDxAtlanta. That actually is invigorating. It’s a very renewing process of organizing that endeavor. And it helps me process the other kind of work problems that I have, the revenue generating problems that I have that I’m helping to overcome and add value to. That is my mode.

Jacqui Chew: [00:41:47] So, I think people have to find what works for them. I’m describing what actually works for me in this instance. The whole sleep hygiene thing, absolutely, that works for everybody. That applies to everybody. The hours, that’s individualized. Everyone has a sweet spot. And then, finally – gosh – a lot of what happens that may not be obvious is that people with bipolar disorder, when there is an episode and there’s a true multi-week, multi-month episode of depression, what it does is, it also completely obliterates your self-confidence. And one of the ways to rebuild self-confidence is to do volunteer work.

Jacqui Chew: [00:42:43] So, when I experienced the very long episode from February 2008 to 2009, July, August, was the way I slowly came back to the world, so to speak, was beyond the talk therapy, beyond the medication, beyond the group support sessions every two weeks, every month. I also began to volunteer at, actually, St. Vincent de Paul in this case, where something as simple as stocking shelves at the food bank. So, rebuilding a sense of confidence is really, really important in the recovery process as well. And engaging in activities that reinforce your sense of self when you’re not in an episode, when things are being managed, when your condition is being managed is also very important.

Mike Blake: [00:43:58] So, one question I want to make sure to get to is – and I’m curious about this for myself, because as a manager, as a leader, I may encounter this – if somebody that were in my charge were to approach me and sort of close the door and just say, “Hey, look. I’ve got this issue. I’ve got this issue of bipolar disorder. And I just want to let you know about it, because some things you may not expect to happen, might happen. Or I may have specific needs, I need help manage it.” What’s the best way for me to react to that? Should I react to it? Do I hit them off to H.R.? I mean, how can I engage constructively in that conversation?

Jacqui Chew: [00:44:50] Well, that’s a tough one, Mike, because you’re now wandering into labor laws and H.R., all of that. That’s the difference. So, I’ll tell you how I react in the past to team members who come to me whose work performance had visibly, obviously fallen off. And I’ve had this composition, I initiated a conversation. And then, they told me that there has been a series of deaths in the family and they were just not feeling well. It’s months apart. So, first of all, regardless of what your H.R. policy is about this, I think it’s important to just listen. Sometimes the best action is no action. And sometimes the person may just want to be heard.

Jacqui Chew: [00:45:50] People have to consider that. I mean, there may not be an action necessarily. The person, they just want to be heard. Because it’s very lonely when you’re experiencing symptoms. You feel like you’re the only one in the world feeling it when it’s not true. But your brain is telling you that you’re the only one. So, just being an ear and not committing to anything, not saying anything, and just understanding and showing kindness and empathy, that sometimes can be enough.

Mike Blake: [00:46:34] I really like that. And, you know, it reminds me actually of a quote from Art of War that suggests that one of the hardest things to do but the best thing to do is simply nothing. I’m paraphrasing. It’s really, one of the hardest things to do in battle is wait. But, you know, it translates very well there that sometimes the best thing to do is just nothing. And for somebody like me who prefers to be proactive and, frankly, would like to help, if somebody comes to me with something like that, my first instinct is how can I help? Even though I am patently unqualified to help somebody. I don’t have that condition. I’ll have medical training. You know, I read what I read on the Internet, half of which is probably wrong. But I think that’s a really good piece of advice. I really do. And it’s surprisingly hard.

Jacqui Chew: [00:47:32] Yes, it is. So, being heard is often times the best answer for the person across the table who is sharing something that is very difficult for them to share. Making sure that they feel heard is possibly the best gift that you can give them as manager. Now, I think, though, the situation would be different if you are sensing that they could possibly hurt themselves. It could be in that state. You never know. So, first of all, you never know. But if you even have a glimmer of that, then it’s time to have a conversation with your H.R. to better understand all the different angles.

Mike Blake: [00:48:32] We’re talking with Jacqui Chew, and the topic is, Should I be open about my mental illness? And that conversation is adjacent to something that I started a conversation in our company, about, three years ago – not long after I joined, actually. And this is in the wake of the Ohio State scandal where one coach was abusing his wife, and other coaches knew, and apparently didn’t do anything. Certainly, not enough to kind of intervene in that. And the question I ask and still ask – because there’s really no great answer – is, as an employer, as a leader, if I hear something like that in my firm, what are my obligations, both ethical and legal? What are my constraints, both ethical and legal? And I think what you just described is actually quite adjacent to that.

Mike Blake: [00:49:32] So, we need to wrap up here. We could do this for a lot longer, but we have limited time. I want to be respectful of the rest of your day. But I am curious about about one thing, you know, in the 15, 16 years that you’ve struggled with this and have become an advocate for awareness, do you think that as a society we’ve gotten better at acknowledging the importance, severity, and impact of mental illness?

Jacqui Chew: [00:50:03] Unequivocally, yes. And it’s been accelerated by the onset of COVID. Ironically, COVID has affected such a large swath of the population in terms of the social distancing and isolation having such a profound impact on a person’s psyche and for many people. That it has given those of us who were diagnosed before, who have diagnosed condition, it’s given us a broader audience. There’s more empathy. There’s less likelihood of the other person, saying, “Oh, it’s all in your head.”

Mike Blake: [00:50:51] Right. It’s a stupid thing to say.

Jacqui Chew: [00:50:57] Well, people say it.

Mike Blake: [00:50:59] There’s no shortage of stupid things for people to say. But go on.

Jacqui Chew: [00:50:59] There you go. Or this notion that, if you take a pill, if you take a series of pills, and you go to your doctor, you’ll be fine. Because the pandemic has affected so many people in so many different ways that there’s a really good chance if you talk to your neighbors, they know someone in their family or they know someone in their second ring of peers or friends and associates who’ve been affected by the pandemic from a mental health point of view.

Jacqui Chew: [00:51:37] So, my point is, mental health issues are more prevalent as a result of the pandemic. And, therefore, the conversation around it is just more mainstream. COVID has mainstreamed mental health, and the challenges, and the symptoms, and the problems. And there’s a distinct level volume of conversation that’s happening on social media, on Clubhouse, and on Twitter.

Jacqui Chew: [00:52:14] I mean, even at Ted, I spent my lunch time listening and watching a whole panel of iconic TED speakers as part of this thing that Ted puts together. And Monica Lewinsky was there. She’s a huge advocate for mental health and normalizing the conversation around mental health. She shares my vision and my wish that – gosh – I wish that it could be a dinner table conversation, just like diabetes. Like, talking about how’s your dad’s diabetes coming along? How’s he managing it? Is he exercising? I wish we could talk about how’s your brother’s mood disorder coming along? Is he getting his weekly needs? I mean, I would love to see that happen. And I think we are closer. We’re not there, but we’re closer because of the pandemic.

Mike Blake: [00:53:10] I think that’s a great place to put a pin in this and wrap it up. And maybe we’ll do a part two at some point. I only got through about half the questions, but that’s fine. How can people contact you for more information about this, maybe just to share their journey or get your advice?

Jacqui Chew: [00:53:28] Sure. So, I’m active on Facebook. It’s just Jacqui Chew. I’m also active on LinkedIn, also Jacqui Chew. And I have a website, jacquichew.com.

Mike Blake: [00:53:39] Yeah. As you can tell, Jacqui is not an introvert. She is not hard to find. And that’s going to wrap it up for today’s program. I like to thank Jacqui so much for joining us and sharing her expertise with us. And on a side note, frankly, just for having the courage to be this advocate, I am confident that it has helped a lot of people over the way. And I’m equally confident is going to help at least a few listeners to this program.

Mike Blake: [00:54:05] We’ll be exploring a new topic each week, so please tune in so that when you’re faced with your next business decision, you have clear vision when making it. If you enjoy these podcasts, please consider leaving a review with your favorite podcast aggregator. It helps people find us that we can help them. If you like to engage with me on social media, with my Chart of the Day and other content, I’m on LinkedIn as myself and @unblakeable on Facebook, Twitter, Clubhouse, and Instagram. Once again, this is Mike Blake. Our sponsor is Brady Ware & Company. And this has been the Decision Vision podcast.

 

Tagged With: atdc, Bipolar disorder, Brady Ware, Brady Ware & Company, iFusion, iFusion Marketing, jacqui chew, Mental Illness, Mental illness stigma, Michael Blake, Mike Blake, schizophrenia, TEDxAtlanta

  • « Previous Page
  • 1
  • …
  • 6
  • 7
  • 8
  • 9
  • 10
  • …
  • 15
  • Next Page »

Business RadioX ® Network


 

Our Most Recent Episode

CONNECT WITH US

  • Email
  • Facebook
  • LinkedIn
  • Twitter
  • YouTube

Our Mission

We help local business leaders get the word out about the important work they’re doing to serve their market, their community, and their profession.

We support and celebrate business by sharing positive business stories that traditional media ignores. Some media leans left. Some media leans right. We lean business.

Sponsor a Show

Build Relationships and Grow Your Business. Click here for more details.

Partner With Us

Discover More Here

Terms and Conditions
Privacy Policy

Connect with us

Want to keep up with the latest in pro-business news across the network? Follow us on social media for the latest stories!
  • Email
  • Facebook
  • Google+
  • LinkedIn
  • Twitter
  • YouTube

Business RadioX® Headquarters
1000 Abernathy Rd. NE
Building 400, Suite L-10
Sandy Springs, GA 30328

© 2025 Business RadioX ® · Rainmaker Platform

BRXStudioCoversLA

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of LA Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversDENVER

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Denver Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversPENSACOLA

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Pensacola Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversBIRMINGHAM

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Birmingham Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversTALLAHASSEE

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Tallahassee Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversRALEIGH

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Raleigh Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversRICHMONDNoWhite

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Richmond Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversNASHVILLENoWhite

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Nashville Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversDETROIT

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Detroit Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversSTLOUIS

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of St. Louis Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversCOLUMBUS-small

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Columbus Business Radio

Coachthecoach-08-08

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Coach the Coach

BRXStudioCoversBAYAREA

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Bay Area Business Radio

BRXStudioCoversCHICAGO

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Chicago Business Radio

Wait! Don’t Miss an Episode of Atlanta Business Radio